JP6764605B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a so-called ball-type gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as "pachinko gaming machine" or "pachinko machine"), a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine", "slot machine", etc.) It is about a game machine.

In a general pachinko game machine, whether or not a game ball (game medium) is launched into a game area and a big hit that is advantageous to the player is generated when the ball enters a start port provided in the game area. A lottery (special lottery) will be held. Then, a variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the lottery result of the special lottery, and a variable display using a decorative symbol is also performed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, and the big hit is won in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize. Whether or not is indicated.

In this type of gaming machine, an upper plate in which a game medium for driving into the game area is stored below the game area in front view and a lower plate in which the game medium is stored below the upper plate are stored. And have. (For example, Patent Document 1)

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-273844

However, in a game machine provided with a plate for storing such a game medium, a more suitable one is required to realize a function as a plate.

The present invention proposes a more suitable lower plate configuration in a game machine.

The present invention
A game machine with a front door
The upper plate provided on the front door and
A storage unit provided on the front door and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper plate,
A predetermined effect device or a predetermined operation device provided on the front door is provided.
The front door is formed with a predetermined space that is out of the reach of the player during the game at a position including the upper part of the storage unit, and the effect device or the operation device is arranged in the predetermined space. It's a thing
The storage unit is provided with a storage unit cover that blocks communication between the game ball storage area in the storage unit and the predetermined space.
The storage portion cover constitutes at least the ceiling portion of the storage portion.
The effect device or the operation device is arranged in the predetermined space without touching the storage portion cover .
The effect device or the operation device can be removed from the predetermined space without removing the storage unit cover from the storage unit .
It is characterized in that, in a state where the effect device or the operation device is removed from the predetermined space, the standing wall portion of the storage portion can be visually recognized from the outside through the predetermined space.

According to the present invention, a more suitable lower plate can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guide portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. is there. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends in the state which turned forward. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the QQ line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the internal passage through which a game ball accepted into a normal electric winning opening flows down. It is a figure explaining the internal passage through which a game ball accepted into a normal electric winning opening flows down. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 as viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 117, as viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 121 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 123. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 123. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 129. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 135. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 143 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 146. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 149. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. 150. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball squeeze determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout ball operation judgment setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of payout setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere motion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error release operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (b) from a CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Embodiment 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Embodiment 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure when a plurality of sensor signal input units connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of the detection circuit part. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the magnetic sensor input circuit of another Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which arranged the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board. It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which arranged the voltage raising part and the detection circuit part on the same board, and arranged the voltage output part on another board (sensor board). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which arranged the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board, and arranged the detection circuit part on another board (for example, a main control board). It is a figure which shows the circuit structure which connected a plurality of sensors in parallel to a voltage output part. It is a figure which shows typically the state that integration is aimed at only the component (discrete component) having high security performance against fraud in the 1st control part MCG. It is a figure which shows a part region in the base board of the main control board which concerns on a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table which is referred to at the time of a big hit determination. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the control related to the ordinary symbol. This is an example of a table used when determining the normal symbol fluctuation time based on a plurality of conditions. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of the movable member of the ordinary electric winning opening and the operation pattern of the distribution member provided in the ordinary electric winning opening. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is a figure which shows the 1st production example. It is a figure which shows the 1st production example. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production example. It is a figure which shows the light emitting state of each of the 1st non-electric start winning opening and the 2nd starting opening (the 2nd non-electric start winning opening). It is a figure which shows the light emitting state of each of the 1st non-electric start winning opening and the 2nd starting opening (the 2nd non-electric start winning opening). It is a figure for demonstrating the advance suggestion effect of an open state.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the changing game state when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. The effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and the door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from island facilities (not shown) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. The tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, the ball guidance unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and the ball guidance unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guidance unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. It is provided with a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. It includes an upper part on the left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to the left and right center on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed from the front surfaces of both left and right ends to the rear. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, they are recessed inward on the outer side surface in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that a game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be opened and closed and supported. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width, and an operation portion protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward from the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending from the rear end of the lock body 66a to the left is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. To.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 17B is an outer upper side view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is designed to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

Then, in this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). , The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not have a moment to rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction of moving to the right, the right surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is housed in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be in a held (locked) state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

Further, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be turned back further forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball rental display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. The door frame base 110 includes a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. The upper side and the left and right sides of the through hole 111 forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the door frame base 110 on both the left and right sides, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. Sheet metal 132, vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the front right side of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of protruding pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the side view shape is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the collar member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

When the operator holds a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is used. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thereby, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 in a good state with respect to the main body frame 4.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. In the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151, a mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to protrude upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 regulates the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate so as to protrude upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. Absent.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that protrude into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylinder portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted into 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate by operating the pull-out button 327.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens below the entrance 251a and whose rear is open, and a box in which the rear end of the front cover 251 is closed and the front is open. A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, a rear cover 252, and a front cover. With a ball pulling member 253 having a partition portion 253a which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and which partitions the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. , The game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball pulling member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can rotate around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and a ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

In the ball feed unit 250, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a, and the ball feed member 253 is on the left side of the ball feed member 254. Ball feed solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side, respectively.

The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 is provided with an arcuate slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 253 on the left side of the ball extraction port 251b in front view, and the slit 251c is provided. The working rod 253c of the ball pulling member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed taxiway 323e and the ball removal taxiway 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion that is open to the rear of the end side from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 253 has a partition portion 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 254 and a ball of the partition portion 253a, which is below the entrance 251a and is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball ejection port 251b. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. From the side surface of the rotating paddle portion 253b that is movably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating paddle portion 253b, and the rotating paddle portion 253b below the operating rod 253c It is provided with a weight portion 253d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 253a. The working paddle 253c of the ball pulling member 253 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission unit 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 253a of the entrance 251a and the ball pulling member 253, and the rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It is provided with a ball holding portion 254b recessed in an arc shape toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 254 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric with the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 255.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing toward. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball that has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking portion 254a blocks the movement of the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting port 252a) side, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the paddle portion 254c side closes the ball hitting supply port 252a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a ball feed operating rod 256 that swings back and forth due to the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in a direction and rotates a ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b and feeds the ball. The member 254 includes a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to transmit the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located in. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255, the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 is released. The game ball received by the solenoid can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 in the ball feed unit 250 is controlled by a launch control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 682.

Further, the ball pulling member 253 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 250 is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 253d rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, but the ball feeding member 253 projects forward. The operation rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission unit 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320, so that its rotation is restricted. Therefore, in a normal state, the ball removal member 253 The partition portion 253a of the above partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not invade the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a and moves downward of the operation transmission unit 327a. Along with this, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball pulling member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Will be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

The upper plate ball removal slider 327b on which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is formed is urged upward by the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, and thus is above the partition portion 253a. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball pulling spring 327c via the operating pad 253c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 253 and the like from being damaged. , It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and the ball feed unit 250 is formed. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 261 and the upper piece portion 261 separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 252a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250 by the ball launcher 680 and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating a string to move an illegal game ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launcher 680 causes fraud. A string attached to the game ball was inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 became narrower. It can be cut depending on the part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit body 271. 272 and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full-tank ball receiving port 274 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through-ball passage 273 in the front view and can communicate with the full-tan taxiway 862 of the lower full-filled ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And have.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 274, and although it is launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. The foul ball socket 275 that receives the foul ball, and the game ball that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank socket 274 and the foul ball socket 275 are forward. It is provided with a ball discharge port 276 that discharges to and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the dish unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharging port 276 by the unit body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large size, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. It includes a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in the direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that urges the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game ball can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower plate 322 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect and urge the lower plate 322 to be filled up.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and is a taxiway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the working protrusion 863e of the 863 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. It is provided with a handle cover 303 that can be attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and the handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. The handle base 301 and the inner have a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 308 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side are attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 urging in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside. The single-shot button 311 that protrudes and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 so as to rotate around the axis, and the single-shot button 311 is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting the pressing operation. It is equipped with a single-shot button operation sensor 312.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base 301a, and the cylindrical base 301a. It also has three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180, and the ridges 183 are formed in the three groove portions 301c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 301 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. The locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusion 302b, the third protrusion 302c, and the fourth protrusion 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges outward so that the side surface of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 in the front view clockwise direction bulges outward, and is the opposite side of the anti-city area. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 302b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 302b is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly low. The side surface of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction of the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the anti-city decision on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed like this and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 302d is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of the fourth protrusion 302d are inclined in a substantially straight line, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a whose front center is round and bulges forward and protrudes rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle mounting member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 is attached. The handle unit 300 attached via the handle unit 300 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the launch solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player is rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the launch control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustrated). Is omitted) to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 the driving before operating the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most in the clockwise direction in the front view. The position of the first protrusion 302a when the fourth protrusion 302d does not rotate the handle 302 when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"). By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state, and the game can be played. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 is hit to the right while in the normal game state, it is difficult to accept the game balls at various entrances despite the large consumption of the balls held. It is disadvantageous for the player compared to the case.

[3-3. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. Further, FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

The plate unit 320 contains an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower plate 322 that can be stored is provided.

The plate unit 320 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 is a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the upper plate ball removal button 327, which are attached so that they can be pressed from above on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the ball lending button 328, and the ball lending button 328. And the ball rental display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and the lower plate ball removal button 333 that protrudes forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322 and is attached so that it can be pressed from the front. I have.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view, and is formed in the shape of a container opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. There is. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) Is submerged (see FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled on the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so that it is slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a to the upper plate. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction is narrowed is lowered downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of storage of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. It is provided with a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect effect operation unit 400 (second effect effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

The lower plate 322 has a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k of a plate unit cover 326 that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open lower plate main body 325. The dish unit is formed by a dish unit base 323 that closes the rear side, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of a portion protruding into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the lower dish body 325. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 is a trapezoid in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side. It is formed in a shape similar to a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 325 passes through the flat bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and the bottom wall portion 325a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base, the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides extending diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (upper surface) is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the front view on the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover an approximately right half portion above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 is omitted from the cover standing wall portion 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. It is provided with a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side in the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface-shaped portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion diagonally extending between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (directing operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the front left end to the right side of the portion extending shortly to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is the directing operation unit 400 in the front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes the lower plate first region A1 (the area of the crosshatch in FIG. 45) located behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 described later, and the lower plate. Lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area) and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has more than half of the storage area (corresponding to the storage area in the plan view, which is the combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which the game balls can be stored. It is located behind the production operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right side of the center in the front left-right direction of the rear wall. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 which is behind the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (dish unit cover 326) that bulges forward toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range that can be seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed larger in the lower plate second region A2 than in the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. ), And the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertips from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, when the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, in a state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply is provided when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, but is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved diagonally with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is used. When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c does not enter the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and immediately from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, so that the lower plate 321 and the payout device 830 are used for payout. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play the game (the operation of driving the game ball). And directing images, etc.) can be devoted to suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower plate 322 Even if the game ball supplied to the inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mounting space 326j side from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, it is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Since the game ball can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damages them. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper plate ball removal button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, but the lower plate cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, but the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally from the upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. It may be a lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.) is shown to have a uniform surface shape without a through hole, but a plurality of penetrations through which the game ball cannot pass. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which the game ball cannot pass. It may be a thing or a thing formed in a net shape. In addition, a light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower dish 322 (to be decorated with light emission). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the four members may be integrated to form the lower plate 322 in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. Integrated, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. , The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide on the lower plate]
An embodiment in which the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 includes a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from that in (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the ball guide part further different. In FIG. 46, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c arranged apart from each other on the left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guide portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide portions 322c without getting over the ball guide portion 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the punch hole 322a.

Then, in the same manner as above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate second region A2). The punch holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guide portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, it is an illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

In the example of FIG. 46 (a), a rail-shaped ball guide portion 322c is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed on the right wall portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a cushioning portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is tilted so that it becomes. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Will be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, in the same manner as above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also rearward on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326 which is the lower plate second region A2). It is arranged behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340) so that it cannot be seen from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the cushioning portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d can reflect the sound in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharge it downward (dollar box) without sound. Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the game balls are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), a portion of the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in between. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the plate and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. For the return portion 322e, the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322 may be used, or a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that alleviates the collision sound at the time of reflection may be used. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400 which is the lower plate second region A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the return portion 322e allows the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side. It can be reflected downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and FIG. 47 (b) is a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the lower plate of (b) in schematic perspective view. In the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47, the lower plate main body 325 can be divided with the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It includes a main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B which is attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2. The first extension unit 325B is more than the main body unit 325A, and is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It protrudes into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, the first extension unit 325B has a relief portion 322b formed in the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). , The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is formed by a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the main body. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the width of the second extension portion 325C in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end is formed to be constant, and the storage area of the game ball is formed larger than that of the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C to the main body portion 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage areas of the game balls are connected. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C in the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. It is formed so as to create a space).

As described above, in the above example, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a structure that can be divided and at least one of the divided members can be exchanged, the game ball in the lower plate 322 The storage area can be increased or decreased as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes rearward (inside the mounting space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is below. It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first region A1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325, but the game ball is on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided like the lower plate main body 325, and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion can be divided. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (rear is opened) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110. It is formed in a shallow box shape).

The plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 323a and the upper plate ball supply port 323a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c penetrating the front and rear at the lower part on the left side from the center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 324.

Further, the plate unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides a game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging from the lower side of the feed guideway 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the tubular front view of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and is extended from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. The ball-extracting taxiway 323f that guides the released game ball to the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower end of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e and the upper end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f on the left side of the front view of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e. With an opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at a height between the two, comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250, and the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the upper plate ball removing button 327 protrudes rearward. , Is equipped. The downstream end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f opens into a tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. 323i is provided with a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the tubular rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. It penetrates 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower plate ball supply port 323c, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a tubular rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. Then, it is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The dish unit cover 326 is provided on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the effect operation unit 400 is mounted and the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens wide in the front in the left-right direction. The plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and the plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b are provided. There is.

The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at a height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 ends on the left-right center side and the left and right end sides. The middle part is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. Further, the lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 is inclined so as to move upward in the left-right direction. It is formed so as to narrow in the vertical direction from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right end sides. The plate unit cover 326 has an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the left side of the front view.

The front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the left-right center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right both ends, and the left-right center end and the left-right end side of the dish unit cover 326. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the middle part is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating the front and back is formed in the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled in the dish unit 320.

The front lower right decorative portion 326c on the right side of the front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the right side of the front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h causes the upper plate 321 to have a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The plate unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-shaped bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The lower side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is open forward at the portion of the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends in a flat plate shape from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d to the rear, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321. By pressing the upper plate 321, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h by the ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to. The upper end of the ball pulling lever extending vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball pulling button 327. The ball pulling lever is slidably attached in the vertical direction by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball pulling button 327.

The ball pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball pulling button 327 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b slidably attached up and down by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327a is formed from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is urged upward by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and by the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever are used. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission portion 327a of the upper plate ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission unit 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 253a enters. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball ejection port 251b is released, and they are in a state of communicating with each other. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

When the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the operation. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the troublesomeness of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to dedicate the player to the game (driving operation of the game ball, production image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As shown, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327 on the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses it to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented (paid out) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after deducting the amount of the loaned game ball.

Although not shown, the ball rental display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged under the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or It displays an error code, etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the figure, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the left side of the front view near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 can be used by the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select the desired option. ..

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower plate 322, and projects forward from the lower front lower end of the lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view. By pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball removal button 333 can be slid in the front-rear direction by the lower plate ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 under the lower plate body 325. It is attached to. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The lower plate ball removal base 335 is accommodated in a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side to the upper side at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower plate ball removing base 335 has a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower plate ball removal base 335 also opens, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a And are in communication with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower plate ball removal base 335 about a position to the left of the lower plate ball removal button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball extraction base 335. As a result, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown, the lower plate ball removing base 335 has a holding device for holding the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball removing button. A lower plate ball pulling spring that urges the 333 forward is attached. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved to the rear. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is maintained in an open state, and the lower plate is maintained. The game ball in the 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed backward to release the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. By moving, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. As a result, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327 also moves the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, simply operating the upper plate ball removal button 327 causes the dollar box via the lower plate 322. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in removing the ball. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and FIG. 53 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 mounted on the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape in a cross section at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b, which are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a tubular extension from the front end of the main body 413a to the front end side are inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c that are slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 that is inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to come into contact with the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is closed by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 which is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 that are attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 that is attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from the position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and the portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the cutout portion 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the board base 421. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The left outer decorative board 422 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. Both the front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the operation button 410 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 is composed of four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically at the center, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, and an operation button internal decorative member 432 that is attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and has a short tubular shape in the front-rear direction. The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decorative member 432, respectively. The operation button upper inner decorative board 435 and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. It includes a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three pressure detection sensors 440, which are attached to 439 and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, an effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and an effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side is provided.

The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially quadrangular through hole 431a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a has a size that fits within the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed to a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the outside of the through hole 431a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 431b is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 431b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. ..

Further, the unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the portion where the inner decorative substrate 435 on the operation button is attached and the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper part of the front surface. It has. With this light-shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending shortly in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. It is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 432e, which project rearward from the surface and are mounted on the unit base 431.

The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decorative member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button internal decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , It is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric circles centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b. It is provided with a second button internal decoration portion 432 g (see FIG. 63), which is provided in a plurality of shapes. The second button inner decoration portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending parallel to the four inner periphery of the opening 432c.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed of a transparent member. The rear part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 cannot be clearly seen due to the lens effect of the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and these LEDs are mounted. By emitting light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be made to emit light. By illuminating the interior decoration member 432 of the operation button, the interior of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 is white. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431. When the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end is a guide boss projecting rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 440 have one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one on the lower left side on the front surface of the unit base 431. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b of the above via the sensor holder 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side in the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decorative board 433, an operation button right inner decorative board 434, and an operation button upper inner decorative board. 435, decorative board under the operation button 436, frame top lens decorative board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460 for relaying the connection between the door frame base unit 100 and the door body relay board. It is a thing.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 442a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operating unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect unit mounting portion of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4e. Door frame side production display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front side and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. It is provided with a bottomed square tubular mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed to have the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape is attached so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for production in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the production operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, but the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the gap on the outer circumference of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer circumference of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other, and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, it is possible to show the moving decoration to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of the player, and it can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 is emitted. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of the second embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. In the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described below with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450, which is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front side, and the second base unit 450, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is attached to the door frame side and can display the effect image, and the buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are provided.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A covers the surfaces of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it is provided. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view.

The second production operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decorative board 482, a switching drive motor 492, and a projector 500. The purpose is to relay the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It is provided with an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

The specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second production operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex toward the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A right-angled triangle and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are arranged in multiple rows alternately over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and a button lens 411 in the truss-shaped pattern. A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a base facing the center side of the surface, a side extending from both ends of the base toward the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base. And the diagonal side of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss-like pattern to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right-angled triangle pattern, and the right-angled triangle shape from the tip of that side. It is formed by a modified isosceles triangular pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the diagonal side of the pattern.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, the triangles constituting the first button decorative portion 411a are formed in a polyhedral shape with their faces facing different directions. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, whereas the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at this portion, and the light passing through this portion is diffusely refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see due to diffuse refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 is held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the tubular shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to move forward and backward by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from the rear.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The second effect operation unit 400A can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the board base 421. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A is attached with the operation button 410 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

The second base unit 450 protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the rear of the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c in the button base 413 of the operation button 410. An operation button spring through which four cylindrical button shafts 452 and four button shafts 452, which are slidably inserted from each other, are inserted and the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 is urged forward. (Not shown), and three pressure detection sensors 454, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect each of the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 has an annular main body 451a, a cover portion 451b that hemispherically protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface to the rear of the main body portion 451a in a blind hole shape, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e, which is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper part of the main body portion 451a, and the upper bearing portion 451e, which is vertically recessed from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body portion 451a A pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a and the lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed in a (U shape) shape to regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And have.

The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference formed in substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, rotates. There is. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass through from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d projects forward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can be done.

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. ..

Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the operation buttons are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. The 410 is urged forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape with the front open and extending rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular shape are coaxially located. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front side, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

Each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front surface is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed so as to be separated from each other in a predetermined angle circumferential direction with the central axis as the center. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulate the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by abutting the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in each pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and by magnetically adhering to an iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, they come into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the second with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in either the position state, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to rotate due to the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 is suppressed on the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second production display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. The upper bearing member 480, which is mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounts the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 are mounted. It includes a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

Further, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side rotates the screen unit 470 and is mounted in the upper part of the second base unit 450 in the rotation drive unit 490 and in the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting an effect image onto the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted so as to cover from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. The upper cover 506 is provided, and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470 are provided.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 around an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be visually displayed (projected) by the player.

The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical shape, a milky white and translucent main screen 471, and a disk shape having one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer circumference, and the central portion is an axis. The sub-screen 472, which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, is milky white and has translucency, and the main screen 471 protrudes outward in the axial direction from the center of both ends in a columnar shape. Penetrates the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. Subscreen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.), which is transparent and formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and subscreen 472, which is attached to the back surface side of the subscreen 472. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the screen and the end of the main screen 471 opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. It is provided with a semi-arc-shaped peripheral decorative member 478 that extends shortly.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. Both ends of the main screen 471 in the axial direction are decorated so as to be bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape coincides with the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 closes the peripheral decorative portion 472a, which is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side and has a plurality of rows of square pyramid-shaped irregularities in the circumferential direction, and the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a. It is provided with a curved surface-shaped screen portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape as a whole so that the inner peripheral side projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 and are rotatably attached.

The actuating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference by meshing with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b is provided with a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc shape about the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetized with a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become like.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the subscreen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The subscreen decorative member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the subscreen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness thereof changes in a complicated manner, the transmitted light is complicatedly refracted and the rear can be visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sub-screen decorative member 476 has the characters "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The subscreen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the subscreen 472 so as to form a gap between the subscreen 472 and the subscreen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are attached to the front side (the side facing the subscreen 472). Is implemented. The outer shape of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the subscreen decorative member 476, and the surface is white. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decorative member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can strongly illuminate the "eye" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH" by emitting light from the LED 477a.

Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a is made to emit light. , The point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the subscreen decorative substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 on the subscreen 472.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are the main body portions of the unit base 451 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f which are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of the 451a. Further, in the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451 the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and the bearing member. A frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481 is provided. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the shaft core of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the screen is internally formed. A stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed 481a allows the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state of being assembled to the second production operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 with the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and whose rotary shaft projects into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first spur gear that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 495.

The rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, and the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project the effect image onto the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 that is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward in a columnar shape from the projector body 501 and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. It is installed like this.

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. By mounting the projector mounting member 505 on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, it is possible to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating the front and rear are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated from each other by 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position facing forward, and the detection piece 475c in the second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c and the time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signals of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and cushions the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above to reduce the impact of the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat cushioning member 511, whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. It includes a cushioning base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively accessible to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511 and a leg piece that projects downward from both left and right sides of the main body 512a and extends in the front-rear direction. 512b and. The leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

In the cushioning unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510. Move down to. The impact is absorbed by compressing the cushioning member 511. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512. Since the left and right leg pieces 512b form a gap between the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body 512a bends, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , The impact will be transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operating unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent excessive force from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their damage.

[3-4g-7. Action effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. In FIG. 77 (a), the second effect operation unit is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410, and to let the player operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

The total height of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being attached to the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is tilted at an angle of 63 degrees so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is slid on the four tubular guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring. It is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416.

In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has the center side (central axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot be retracted straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (near the upper part of the operation button 410) where the player can press the operation button relatively easily, the vibration is strong against the player who is pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a in which the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is applied in multiple stages due to elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second effect operating unit 400A, etc. is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to damage. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) that protrudes forward, it is compared with the case where it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. By decorating the unevenness by combining the triangles of the above, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the CL direction of the central axis), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side. A gap is located between the 460A and the outer circumference of the screen unit 470, but the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (player side) to the outside and the rear side of the screen unit 470. It is possible to make the members of the door difficult to see. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can see the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc., pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outer part (the part of the crosshatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (in FIG. 76, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line). ) Is hidden from the player's side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the second production operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

Further, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The sub-screen decorative member 476, the upper shaft member 473, and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 can be rotated. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player by performing a movement exceeding the player's expectation in the button 410, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decorative member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain the player.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 capable of visually recognizing the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner circumference to the center side of the button frame 412. A polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width is provided, and a door frame side second effect display arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 is provided. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged in a row, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap each other so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of triangles, the peripheral decoration portion 472a mainly composed of quadrangles and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the eyes of the player As the position moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, so the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can change to show the player a moving decoration, and the player can create a deep, three-dimensional decoration. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the drive of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and vertically. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row traverses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decorative portion 472a is in a state in which the peripheral decorative portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in a ring shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or the decoration can be changed. The change can make the player suggest the arrival of an opportunity, etc., and can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a screen having different screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) that can be switched to the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display the effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given and entertained. More specifically, in the screen unit 470, the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 having the disk-shaped and relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center are the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be separated from the axis by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is milky white having translucency. Through the main screen 471 of the above, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the surface of the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the display screen of the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at first glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from the above, to surprise the player, and to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull appears to be located in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear in this state, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since the flat and translucent sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is blocked, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, by emitting the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light emission.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side emits LED 477a of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 made of decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decorative member 476, which is inside the sub-screen decorative member 476, is luminescently decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the luminescent decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), which is completely different from the luminescent decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can draw the player a strong attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the production image inside the production image, so that the production image is partially bright, which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a production image that makes the player more entertaining can be displayed.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the decoration of the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478). As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front surface and the light such as the effect image to the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided with the projector 500, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420 The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer circumference of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with a conventional pachinko machine. , Can give a strong impact to the player and entertain.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the quadrangular opening 531a. It includes a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. It includes a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The square lens portion 532b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 inside the square lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a dividing line. Is arranged in the radial direction so that the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with more uniform light. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in a vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle having a front view extending vertically, and is formed in a square tube shape extending back and forth. The portion of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative base 534 on the left unit is inclined so as to project downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535, the lower end of the upper dogleg-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. 82 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffuser lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and on the right side of the front view center of the right unit base 551 and the right unit left diffuser lens. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the right surface and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, they are formed substantially in the center of each vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left shading member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body 553a and the light reflected to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted to the right and left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 becomes transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched in a quadrangular shape from the left end side in the front view to the right, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the inner LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at substantially the center of each vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence on the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left and the right side of the right unit right shading member 560 is right. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decorative member 557 can be visually recognized. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It is provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided with three sets of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, with a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right shading member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left shading member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 decorates the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. Only the medium LED 552c can be used for light emission decoration.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedron decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and the multi-faceted decoration is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to think that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it is possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extending left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top interior decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top interior decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b, respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central side end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the outer ends in the left and right directions. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the front side, respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowing upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center of the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, a plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decoration member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square in the left-right direction is located downward, and a deformed pentagon extending outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the deformed pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the front variable pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. It is mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 near both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side near the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. Is equipped with.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As the interior progresses toward the center, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end side, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right-angled lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The middle left decorative board 586 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the middle left decorative substrate 586 of the door frame top at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The right decorative substrate 587 on the top of the door frame is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the center of the left and right sides of the unit main body 271 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the vicinity of both ends in the left-right direction in which the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action and effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player looks down and presses the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a high-power pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or hangs his left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction and on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 includes a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be light-emitting decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration with a sophisticated feel The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a front view right side surface of the main body frame base 600. The locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right of the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the launch device mounting portion 604. The cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the door of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the center of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and below. A circular shape that penetrates back and forth between the connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward and the lower left side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 so that the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 faces forward. The speaker opening 607 and the like are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 can be rotated at the rear end. It includes a rear extension 608 that can be attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and is attached to the upper hinge for attaching the upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side and the lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side. A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame base 600.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates up and down at the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the shaped plate is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 which penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The hinge hole 644 for the door frame for axially supporting the door frame and the hinge hole 644 for the door frame at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame 3 It is provided with a regulation piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of the.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600 can be reinforced by this reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launcher 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft is attached to the launch base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a hitting mallet 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and a hitting mallet 683 extending diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launcher 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided through the launch rail 684 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the lower foul cover unit 270, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that protrude forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower part of the unit base 701. A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is transmitted according to the rotation direction of the key. It is provided with a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in (a). Further, FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. Is.

Further, FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 111B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is equipped with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs swingably from above.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and the ball guide unit 820 below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. A normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full taxiway receiving port 274 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 and the like are provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 through the partition plate 823. A pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece members rotatably attached by the attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. It includes an 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. The 821b is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d that extends diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lowered at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. The 822b is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the ball guide inlet 822a and the ball guide outlet 822b and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and in a state of being assembled to the ball guidance unit 820, the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. There is.

The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the movable piece 825a, and the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole protruding outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d extend outward in a flat plate shape. It includes a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g The guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member front 825 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Consistent with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball out detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the movable piece 826a, and the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g The guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e) is in contact with the outer wall. When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member 826 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c flows downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member is in front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the 825 or the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball disappears are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. To. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the out of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball, and by shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, the interest of the player is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight As a result, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. The lower end side of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. As the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the single member and the 826 after the movable single member can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the 826 after the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. It is possible to replenish the game balls, and by shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, and has a payout entrance 831a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b are connected to each other, and the game ball can be circulated. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c and allows game balls to flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped box with an open front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a payout that is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout passage 832d that communicates the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to flow. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c to allow game balls to flow.

Further, the payout device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and the rear side is open, and a rotating shaft mounted in the front box 831 and the rotating shaft penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate the front end while being attached to the front cover 833. The shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and the shaft member 838 which is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 which is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side surface of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 831d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f in a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b and protrudes rearward as it goes downward, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 832d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally to the lower right from the payout entrance 832a is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for slidably mounting the ball pulling lever 844 up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that projects rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end so that it can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. A plurality of (three) front blades 839b and a plurality (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. (3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c rotate around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0, which is the outer diameter of the game ball. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. it can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It cannot be discharged from the outlets 831b and 832b downward. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter D1 1 Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions, and has a main body portion 843a in which the lower portion is bent to form a front view shape and a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A barrel portion 843b whose ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843a. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 105), which is formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at the lower portion bent in a dogleg shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment has the ball pulling lever 844 slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent part, and the lower side of the bent part is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removing movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state. A force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball pulling lever 844 regulates the rotation counterclockwise, so that the normal state is maintained.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the axle tube portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball pulling outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing and mounting a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843, and dust It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and is attached to the rear side of the box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a which is open upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and is formed between the upper ball outlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game ball can pass through. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which game balls are distributed, a normal discharge port 850d which is opened downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper ball storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper ball pulling passage 850 g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball pulling entrance 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball pulling passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h are arranged in this order and open downward from the left side in front view. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly under the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b. Is located directly below the ball ejection ports 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled in the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiways of the lower full tank path unit 860. Each of the 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 is opened directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls that are discharged by the payout device 830 and are discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the section 850f and are full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. And a full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3, and usually The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged to close the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and is above the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball removal taxiway 865 that discharges to.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. As shown in the figure, the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the lower side of the normal taxiway 861 and at the position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 with respect to the axis extending back and forth.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base 863a in a flat plate shape and can normally close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The front view of the actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a, and the front end surface is inclined so as to project forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is urged from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a projecting forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 273, the full tank socket 274, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the operating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. The game ball will not spill from the road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 are filled. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of the game ball, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the section 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is canceled.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops paying out the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled in this state. When the game ball is paid out, the payout device 830 may stop paying out the game ball. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with a game ball, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass inside which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board box 950.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board. FIGS. 115 and 116 are diagrams illustrating an internal passage through which a game ball received in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 flows down. FIG. 117 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 shows the game board of FIG. 117. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, and a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. A peripheral control unit attached to the rear side of the 1100 and a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image are further provided. ing. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit is attached to the rear surface. The back unit is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening on the rear wall, or is attached to the rear surface of the back box on the game board side. It is configured to include a lock mechanism or the like for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, the back unit is a back left middle decorative unit mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box, and the back box below the opening in the back box. The back lower rear movable effect installed near the rear wall, the back upper left movable effect unit installed on the left side of the front view above the opening in the back box, and the front view of the opening in the back box The back left movable effect unit installed on the left side, the back upper middle movable effect unit installed above the opening in the back box from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view, and the opening in the back box. It is equipped with a lower back lower front movable production unit that is attached to the front of the lower back lower rear movable production unit.

[Board composition of the game board]
Hereinafter, the board surface configuration of the game board will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116.

As shown in FIG. 114, a game board side effect display device 1600 having a liquid crystal display type display area is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. In the game board side effect display device 1600, a variable game is performed in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols included in a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) are displayed in a variable manner, and is executed in connection with the variable game. Various display effects are displayed as images.

As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5 includes a first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs, a second special symbol display 1405 composed of eight LEDs, and the like. Has been done. In the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, the symbol variation for displaying the special symbol is performed. The special symbol is a symbol for notification indicating the result of determination of whether or not it is a big hit (big hit determination). Then, in the present embodiment, the variation game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol variation of changing and displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is started. It is supposed to be executed as one game until the end. Hereinafter, the symbol variation performed by the first special symbol display 1403 may be referred to as "first side symbol variation", and the symbol variation performed by the second special symbol display 1405 may be referred to as "second side symbol variation". Sometimes.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which special symbol is used for the jackpot determination from among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the symbol variation is started. Is now selected. Then, when a jackpot determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, control is performed to start symbol variation on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the jackpot determination. This is done (main control board 1310). The symbol variation started in this way is different from the jackpot symbol (big hit display result), which is a stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the jackpot after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the jackpot determination. By stopping in the form of one of the out-of-order symbols (out-of-order display result), which is a stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the player, the player recognizes whether the jackpot is won or lost. You will be able to do it. If the game is stopped in the form of a big hit symbol, a big hit game in which a prize ball can be obtained by the player is given.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is composed of a display area larger than each symbol display 1403, 1405, and in the display area, each of a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) is formed. Multiple types of decorative symbols (multiple types of numbers) included are displayed larger than the special symbols.

Then, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the display result corresponding to the display result of each symbol display 1403, 1405. More specifically, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, the game board side effect display device 1600 also has a special symbol combination (all rows). When a fixed stop display is displayed (such as a combination of symbols with the same symbol) and the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is displayed as a stop, the game board side effect display device 1600 Also in, the symbol combination at the time of loss (such as a symbol combination in which the symbols in all rows are not the same symbol) is displayed as a fixed stop display. As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether the jackpot has been won or lost (missed) by checking the variable game played on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of left column → right column → middle column when viewed from the player side, and specific two rows (in this embodiment). When the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right two rows), a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left column and the right column are the reach formation columns forming the reach state among the plurality of symbol columns. It becomes.

Here, the "temporary stop display" can appear on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 during the period in which the special symbol maintains the fluctuating state, and is on the game board side. This is a state in which a specific decorative symbol is displayed in a fluctuating state within the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" can appear when the special symbol is stopped on or after the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and is on the game board side. This is a state in which all the decorative symbols are stopped without shaking in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 also includes a first special hold number indicator 1404 composed of two LEDs for displaying the hold number related to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002. The second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, and the normal judgment result determined by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are displayed. A normal symbol display 1402 composed of four LEDs and a normal hold display 1408 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are provided.

Here, the first special hold number indicator 1404 notifies the player of the number of stored jackpot determinations on the first special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserved stored number) that is held in the unexecuted state. Is what you do. The first reserved memory number is added by "1" when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2002 arranged on the game board 5, while it is "1" when the first side symbol change is started. It is subtracted. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002 within the period in which the first side symbol change is performed, the first reserved storage number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to "4") is accumulated.

In addition, the second special hold number indicator 1406 notifies the player of the number of stored jackpot determinations on the second special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved stored number) that is held in the unexecuted state. It is a thing. The second reserved memory number is added by "1" when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2004 arranged on the game board 5, while it is "1" when the second side symbol change is started. It is subtracted. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004 within the period in which the second side symbol is changed, the second reserved storage number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to "4") is accumulated.

Further, in the normal symbol display 1402, when the determination of whether or not it is a normal hit (normal determination) is performed, the normal symbol variation that fluctuates a plurality of types of ordinary symbols is performed based on the result of the normal determination. This normal symbol variation is the normal hit symbol (normal hit display result), which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal hit after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the normal judgment. By stopping in the form of one of the normal symbol (outlier display result), which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal loss, the player wins or loses the normal symbol (normal loss). You will be able to recognize what you have done. When the game is stopped in the form of a normal hit symbol, the normal electric winning opening 2011, which will be described later, is opened.

In addition, the normal hold display 1408 notifies the player of the number of normal determination memories (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of normal figure hold storages) held in the unexecuted state. The normal number of reserved symbols is added by "1" when the game ball is accepted by the gate portion 2003 arranged on the game board 5, while it is subtracted by "1" when the normal symbol change is started. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted by the gate portion 2003 (individually, the gate portion 2003a or the gate portion 2003b) within the period in which the normal symbol change is performed, the number of reserved symbols is further added and a predetermined number is determined. (Maximum number of normal figures, "4" in this embodiment) is accumulated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first side symbol variation and the second side symbol variation are not executed at the same time, and the symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation). When both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "1" or more when the above is completed, the second-side symbol variation based on the second reserved storage number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (first-side symbol variation or second-side symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation can be executed at the same time.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 is configured to include, for example, a first starting winning opening 2002a and a first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b.

The first start winning opening 2002a is arranged as an entrance that is always open directly under the game board side effect display device 1600 so that the game ball can always be accepted, and a prize is won in the back of the entrance. A switch for detecting the game ball is provided as a first start port sensor 4002 (see FIG. 123).

The first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is arranged as a reception port having a first driven member that can operate between an open state and a closed state at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600. A switch for detecting a winning game ball is also provided in the back of the receiving port as a first starting port sensor 4002 (see FIG. 123). The switch in the first non-electric start winning opening 2002a and the switch provided in the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b are provided separately, and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b is in an open state (predetermined number). It is desirable to monitor the relationship between (maintaining the open state until accepted) and the number of accepted game balls to determine an error. The first non-electric start winning opening 2002b can accept a right-handed game ball when it is in the open state, but does not accept the game ball by any game method when it is in the closed state. Arranged in a structure (see FIG. 114).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b uses the weight of the game ball received at another receiving port to open the first driven member. There is no fixed limit time for operating or maintaining the open state, and it is provided so that the open state is maintained until a predetermined number (for example, one or two) of game balls are accepted. It has a similar structure, which will be described later.

Then, when the game ball is accepted by the first start opening 2002 (the first start winning opening 2002a or the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b) and the game ball is detected by the first start opening sensor 4002, the first hold memory is stored. The jackpot judgment on the 1st special symbol side is newly put on hold on the condition that the number has not reached the upper limit value (more accurately, various random numbers on the 1st special symbol side acquired when detected are stored. Along with the process, the process of increasing the number of first reserved storages by "1" is performed (main control board 1310). At this time, a process of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls) is also performed (payout control board 951).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second starting port 2004 is provided as, for example, a second non-electric starting winning opening.

That is, the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 has a second driven member that can operate between the open state and the closed state at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is arranged as an entrance, and a switch for detecting a winning game ball is also provided as a second starting port sensor 4004 (see FIG. 123) at the back of the receiving entrance. The second non-electric start winning opening 2004 can accept a right-handed game ball when it is in the open state, but does not accept the game ball by any game method when it is in the closed state. Arranged in a structure (see FIG. 114).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 also uses the own weight of the game ball received at the other receiving port to act as the second driven. The open state should be maintained until a predetermined number (for example, one or two) of game balls are accepted because the limit time for the member to move to the open state or to maintain the open state is not fixed. It has a special structure, such as being provided in the above, which will be described later.

Then, when the game ball is accepted by the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 and the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 4004, the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. On the condition that the jackpot judgment on the second special symbol side is newly put on hold (more accurately, various random numbers on the second special symbol side acquired when it is detected are stored), and the process is performed. The process of increasing the number of second reserved storages by "1" is performed (main control board 1310). At this time, a process of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls) is also performed (payout control board 951).

Further, on the lower side of the game board 5 that flows down between the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, a gate portion 2003a through which a game ball can pass can pass. Are arranged. The gate portion 2003a is provided with a switch for detecting a passing game ball as a gate sensor 4003 (see FIG. 123). In the example of FIG. 114, the gate portion 2003a is arranged below between the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The arrangement position of the gate portion 2003a is not limited to this, and may be arranged at a position where a right-handed gaming ball can pass, such as above the ordinary electric winning opening 2011.

Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5, a gate portion 2003b through which the game ball can pass is arranged in the middle of the flow path flowing down toward the first start winning opening 2002a. The gate portion 2003b is also provided with a switch for detecting the passing game ball as a gate sensor (not shown). Such an arrangement position of the gate 2003b is an example, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gate portion 2003a is in a right-handed game (specifically, a time-saving game state, a probabilistic game state, etc.). While the game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball can pass, the gate portion 2003b can be arranged at a position where the game ball can pass during a left-handed game (specifically, in a normal gaming state). .. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gate portion 2003 is arranged at a position where the game ball can pass by either right-handed or left-handed (that is, the game medium passes through the gate in both the time-saving game state and the normal game state. If possible), the number of gate portions 2003 may be one (the gate portions 2003a and 2003b may not be arranged separately).

When the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 (gate parts 2003a, 2003b) and the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 4003, the normal judgment is newly made on the condition that the number of reserved memory in the normal figure has not reached the upper limit value. A process of putting the cell in a hold state (more accurately, storing various random numbers of ordinary symbols acquired when it is detected) is performed, and a process of increasing the number of stored figures on hold by "1" is performed. (Main control board 1310). However, at this time, the process of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls) is not performed. In the following description, a series of processes including acquisition of various random numbers of ordinary symbols and execution of ordinary determination as described above may be referred to as ordinary lottery.

As will be described later, in the game area 5a provided on the game board 5, the right side of the center accessory 2500 is opened when it is shown as a result of the normal symbol change that the normal lottery has been won. An ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is provided, which has a movable member (a pair of movable pieces) capable of operating with the player, and is capable of accepting a game ball when the movable member is in the open state. In this way, the normal symbol variation is performed to derive the determination result (whether or not it is a normal hit) whether or not the movable member of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is in the open state, and the normal hit is won. Then, it becomes easy to win the game ball in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 2002a is on the right side of the center accessory 2500 than when the game ball is rolled (left-handed) from the left side of the center accessory 2500. It is arranged so that it is more difficult to win a prize when the game ball is rolled (right-handed) (in the present embodiment, a prize can be won only when the game ball is left-handed). On the other hand, in the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the gate portion 2003a, and the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the game ball is played from the left side of the center accessory 2500. It is easier to win a prize when the game ball is rolled (right-handed) from the right side (specific area) of the center accessory 2500 than when it is rolled (left-handed) (in this embodiment, right-handed). It is arranged so that you can only win a prize at times).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the gate portion 2003b is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 as described above, the gate portion even when a left-handed game is performed (for example, in a normal game state). When the game ball passes through 2003b, a normal lottery is performed, and when a normal winning result is derived, the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened. However, in order to win a game ball in the ordinary electric winning opening 2100 opened in this way, right-handed hitting is still required.

In addition, in the game board 5 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001, which are always open so that the game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting opening As a result of the big hit judgment performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to 2004, the big winning opening 2005 that can accept the game ball if the big hit is won, and the game ball that has flowed down to the lowermost end of the game area 5a are collected. An out port 1003 or the like for discharging from the game area 5a is provided.

Here, as illustrated in FIG. 114, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large winning opening 2005 is arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the game board 5. By arranging the big winning opening 2005 in such a position, the game ball launched by right-handed can reach the vicinity of the big winning opening 2005, so that the big winning opening 2005 is opened. Right-handed games are recommended in the state.

[About the 1st non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the 2nd starting opening (2nd non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the ordinary electric starting winning opening 2011]
As shown in FIG. 114, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 includes a movable member 2011a that opens and closes by operating the solenoid 2107 (see FIG. 123), and the movable member 2011a operates in the open state. By doing so, it becomes easier to accept the game ball hit to the right. A switch for detecting the winning game ball is provided as a general electric prize sensor 4006 (see FIG. 123) in the back of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, and it is determined in advance that the switch is detected by the general electric prize sensor 4006. A process of paying out the specified number of prize balls (game balls) is performed (payout control board 951).

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c are three branch streams behind the general electric winning sensor 4006 of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 (downstream side). It is formed in parallel as a road. A switch for detecting a game ball flowing down the first passage 2011d is arranged as a first side operation sensor, and detects that the game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 has passed through the first passage 2011d. It is possible. On the other hand, a switch for detecting a game ball flowing down the second passage 2011e is arranged as a second side operation sensor, and the game ball winning the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 has passed through the second passage 2011e. Can be detected. Further, a switch for detecting a game ball flowing down the third passage 2011c is arranged as a third side operation sensor, and the game ball winning the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 has passed through the third passage 2011c. Can be detected.

In addition, between the general electric winning sensor 4006 and the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c, the game balls that have won the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 are placed in the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c. A distribution member 2011b for distributing to any of the three passages 2011c is arranged.

The distribution member 2011b blocks the second passage 2011e and the third passage 2011c by the operation of the distribution solenoid 2109 (see FIG. 123), but does not block the first passage 2011d (shown in FIG. 115 (A)). The second position (position shown in FIG. 115B) that blocks the first passage 2011d and the third passage 2011c but does not block the second passage 2011e, and the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e. It is displaceable from a third position (position shown in FIG. 115 (C)) that blocks but does not block the third passage 2011c. In the following description, another term may be used for the arrangement of the distribution member 2011b when indicating the first position to the third position. That is, based on the direction in which the game ball is guided, the first position is described as "rightward", the second position is described as "leftward", and the third position is described as "middle", or a series of flows due to the guidance of the game ball ( The first position is referred to as "special 1 route", the second position is referred to as "special 2 route", and the third position is referred to as "off route" based on the special symbol variation game in which the acquisition opportunity is given by (details will be described later). To do.

Further, the first passage 2011d is provided with a first activation trigger region (not shown), and the second passage 2011e is provided with a second activation trigger region (not shown). The game ball passing through the first passage 2011d always passes through the first actuation trigger area, and the game ball passing through the second passage 2011e always passes through the second actuation trigger area. Then, the game ball passing through the third passage 2011c cannot pass through either the first actuation trigger area or the second actuation trigger area. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the third passage 2011c is provided with a "disengagement operating region", but in reality, even if the game ball passes through the disengagement operating region, no special operation is activated.

Therefore, when the distribution member 2011b is arranged at the first position (FIG. 115 (A)), the passage of the game ball to the second passage 2011e and the third passage 2011c is restricted, while the first passage is restricted. The passage of the game ball to 2011d is allowed, and the game ball is guided to the first operation trigger region (see FIG. 116 (A)). Further, when the distribution member 2011b is arranged at the second position (when the distribution member 2011b is arranged at the second position (FIG. 115 (B)), the passage of the game ball to the first passage 2011d and the third passage 2011c is restricted, while the second passage 2011e The passage of the game ball to the is allowed, and the game ball is guided to the second operation trigger region (see FIG. 116 (B)). Further, the distribution member 2011b is arranged at the third position (FIG. 115 (C)). If this is the case, the passage of the game ball through the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e is restricted, while the passage of the game ball through the third passage 2011c is permitted. It is guided to a path that does not pass through either the 1st actuation trigger area or the 2nd actuation trigger area (see FIG. 116 (C)).

That is, the distribution member 2011b distributes whether the game ball that has won the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 passes through the first operation trigger area, the second operation trigger area, or does not pass through any of the operation trigger areas. It will be.

That is, the first passage 2011d in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is provided so as to extend at least to a position facing the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b in the front-rear direction by utilizing the space behind the panel plate 1110. There is. The first actuating trigger region (not shown) is provided at the opposite position, and in this first actuating trigger region, the game ball flowing down the game ball is a predetermined member (first actuating mechanism) due to its own weight. A structure is adopted in which the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is operated to the open state by moving the (so-called special 1 route).

More specifically, a first operating mechanism (not shown) is provided on the back side of the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b. The first actuating mechanism opens the first non-electric opening / closing blade (not shown) by coming into contact with a game ball passing through the first actuating trigger region in the first passage 2011d, and acts accordingly. When the driven member of the electric start winning opening 2002b is opened, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b is opened and the winning of the game ball is allowed. That is, the first non-electric opening / closing blade can be mechanically opened according to the passage of the game ball, provided that the game ball has passed through the first operation trigger region in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. It is supposed to work.

Further, the first actuating mechanism comes into contact with the upper limit number of game balls (first upper limit number, two as an example in the present embodiment) that have won a prize in the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, and the first non-electric opening / closing blade. Is closed, and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is closed, so that the winning of the game ball is prohibited. That is, the first non-electric opening / closing blade is mechanical when the game ball wins a prize in the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b with a predetermined first upper limit number as the upper limit after the game ball passes through the first operation trigger region. It is designed to operate in a closed state.

On the other hand, the second passage 2011e in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is located at a position facing the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the front-rear direction by utilizing the space behind the panel plate 1110. It is provided to extend at least to. The second actuating trigger area (not shown) is provided at the opposite position, and in this second actuating trigger region, the game ball flowing down the game ball is a predetermined member (second actuating mechanism) due to its own weight. A structure is adopted in which the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is operated to the open state by moving the (so-called special 2 route).

More specifically, a second operating mechanism (not shown) is provided on the back side of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. The second actuating mechanism opens the second non-electric opening / closing blade (not shown) by coming into contact with the game ball passing through the second actuating trigger region in the second passage 2011e, and the second actuating mechanism follows the opening operation. By opening the driven member of the mouth (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened and the winning of the game ball is allowed. To. That is, the second non-electric opening / closing blade can be mechanically opened according to the passage of the game ball, provided that the game ball has passed through the second operation trigger region in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. It is supposed to work.

Further, the second operating mechanism comes into contact with the upper limit number (second upper limit number, 2 pieces as an example in this embodiment) of the game balls that have won a prize in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. The winning of the game ball is prohibited by closing the second non-electric opening / closing blade and closing the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. That is, the second non-electric opening / closing blade plays a game at the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 with a predetermined second upper limit number as the upper limit after the game ball passes through the second operation trigger region. When the ball wins a prize, it mechanically operates in a closed state.

On the other hand, unlike the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e described above, the third passage 2011c in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is not related to the operating mechanism for operating any of the non-electric opening / closing blades, and the game When the ball passes through the third passage 2011c, a predetermined prize ball is paid out as a mere prize for the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 (so-called off-route). Even when the game ball passes through the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e, the predetermined prize ball is paid out.

It should be noted that the distribution of such game balls at the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 may be made visible to the player. Specifically, by forming the front surface of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 (at least the front surface from the distribution member 2011b to the entrance of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c) with a visible material. Since the flow path of the game ball in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 can be made visible to the player, the game interest can be enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 115 (A) and the like, on the respective paths of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. , Sensors 2011g to 2011i for detecting the passing game balls can be provided, and such sensors 2011g to 2011i can detect the number of game balls passing through each passage. Then, when the main control board 1310 compares the total number of game balls detected by the sensors 2011g to 2011i with the number of game balls detected by the Fuden winning sensor 4006, the results of the comparison are in agreement. In this case, it can be determined that the operation is normal, and if they do not match (that is, if the number of balls entering the normal electric winning opening 2011 does not match the number of detected game balls), it is illegal or defective. It can be determined that the state is abnormal due to. When it is determined that the state is abnormal, it is preferable to notify the error. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the profit of the player varies depending on which passage the game ball passes through in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. Therefore, by providing the sensors 2011g to 2011i in this way, it is illegal. By making it possible to determine the detection of an abnormal state due to a defect, the safety of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

In this way, the first passage 2011d, the first operation trigger area, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the first start port sensor 4002, and the first side operation sensor correspond as mechanisms related to the first side symbol variation, respectively. It is provided as follows. Further, the second passage 2011e, the second operation trigger area, the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004, the second start port sensor 4004, and the second side operation sensor are each related to the second side symbol variation. It is provided so as to correspond as a mechanism. Then, the passage of the game ball into each of the passages 2011d and 2011e (each operation trigger region) can be independently detected by the mechanisms of the plurality of systems.

Further, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b according to the present embodiment is a non-electric accessory, and includes a first non-electric opening / closing blade that operates in an open state by the operation of the above-mentioned first operating mechanism. It has become. The non-electric accessory is an accessory other than the electric accessory that is operated by electric power, and the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened by the operation of the first non-electric opening / closing blade. By operating to the state, the game ball is easily accepted by the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b.

Further, the second non-electric start winning opening 2002b is also regarded as a non-electric accessory, and is provided with a second non-electric opening / closing blade that operates in an open state by the operation of the above-mentioned second operating mechanism. .. The non-electric accessory is an accessory other than the electric accessory that is operated by electric power, and the driven member of the second non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened by the operation of the second non-electric opening / closing blade. By operating to the state, the game ball is easily accepted by the second non-electric start winning opening 2002b.

And, as described above, such a first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and a second non-electric starting winning opening 2002b are limits for maintaining the open state once their driven members move to the open state. The time is not fixed and the open state is maintained until a predetermined number (here, two) of game balls are accepted. Therefore, it is possible to keep the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2002b in the open state even after the time-saving gaming state described later is completed and controlled to the normal gaming state. You will be able to enjoy the game and directing properties that make use of this.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned from the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, and 118 and 119. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or a front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged near the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged near the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a as in the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claw 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 penetrates the notch 1011, 1127 and the lower full tank path unit 860 The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 117, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 121 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially central in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end in the front view, and is opened downward to have a notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch portion 1152 above the notch portion 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear positions where the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel is connected to the front component 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the surface mounting of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since the area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to the fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 120). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 120, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002. The number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. 116. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 114 and the like.

[6-1. Game development with the flow of game balls]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , It is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side (left hit) or the right side (right hit) of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the advantageous gaming state such as the big hit gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right to be released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located directly above the first start winning opening 2002a, so that it is accepted by the first starting winning opening 2002a with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first start winning opening 2002a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted at the start winning opening 2002a or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), An area (specific area) in which the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the gate portion 2003a, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, etc. are provided on the downstream side thereof. Will flow down.

When the game ball hit right in this way passes through the gate portion 2003a, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. When a normal hit is won in this normal lottery and the corresponding selection is shown in the normal symbol variation, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened, and the game ball is accepted into the normal electric winning opening 2011. Is possible. Then, when the game ball is accepted in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the first one depends on whether the accepted game ball flows down the first passage 2011d or the second passage 2011e in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. Either the non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 will operate in the open state. If the game ball received in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 does not flow down in either the first passage 2011d or the second passage 2011e, it will flow down in the third passage 2011c. In this case, the first non-electric Neither the starting winning opening 2002b nor the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 operates in the open state, and the prize balls are paid out in association with the winning of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003b when the game by left-handed is performed. When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003b, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310 in the same manner as when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003a. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to provide an opportunity for a normal lottery even in a normal game state.

In the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, when the normal hit is won, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is operated to the open state after the normal symbol is stopped in the normal hit mode. However, even if a predetermined opening time has not elapsed since the player was operated to the open state, when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls is accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 At this point, the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is returned to the closed state.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 (first starting winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) ) When the game ball is accepted in 2004, the main control board 1310 generates an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time saving game state", etc.) that is advantageous to the player. A jackpot determination (first special symbol side or second special symbol side) is performed as to whether or not. When the jackpot determination is performed in this way, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is variablely displayed for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, and then the symbol mode according to the result. By stopping the special symbol with (big hit symbol, lost symbol), the player can recognize it.

As a result, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is not the jackpot symbol, the starting condition for the next jackpot determination is satisfied, and the main control board 1310 has not executed the execution. Of the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) held in the state of, the jackpot determination having the highest digestion order is digested (executed).

On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol, a jackpot game in which the player can win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. When executing the jackpot game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the round game in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (upper limit number of rounds). One round game is until the large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment), and the specified number (upper limit number of winnings) is set in the large winning opening 2005 during one round game. It will be open until the game ball is won or until the specified time (round game time) has elapsed. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of a predetermined number of rounds is completed, an ending period in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is performed is generated, and when the ending period ends, the big hit game is ended.

Further, the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment may generate a probability-variable gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “probability-changing state”) that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. The probabilistic state is given on condition that the type of the stopped jackpot symbol (special symbol) is a predetermined probabilistic symbol, and the next time regardless of the type of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Until the jackpot game occurs, the probabilistic state favorable to the player is maintained. This probability variation state occurs when the winning probability of the big hit changes from the low probability state to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and the probability of winning the big hit in the big hit judgment fluctuates to a high probability and the big hit Since it is likely to occur, it is advantageous for the player, and the player will play the game while expecting to be in a probabilistic state. In the present embodiment, a jackpot to which a probability variation state is given after the end of the jackpot game may be referred to as a probability variation jackpot, and a jackpot to which a probability variation state is not imparted may be referred to as a non-probability variation jackpot.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, a time-saving game state (hereinafter, also referred to as “time-saving state”) is generated after the end of the big hit game. In this time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol tends to be shorter than in the non-time-saving state (normal game state, etc.) in which the time-saving state does not occur. In particular, the game ball is placed in the normal electric winning opening 2011. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation that derives the result of the normal lottery (normal judgment) as to whether or not it is easy to win a prize is shortened as compared with the non-time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, the winning probability of normal hit shifts from the low probability state to the high probability state. In addition, in the time saving state, when a normal winning is won in the normal lottery, the operation pattern different from the non-time saving state (including the case where the distribution of the operation pattern which of the plurality of operation patterns is executed is different). ), The movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 can be opened and closed.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment not only makes it easier for the game ball to enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 in the non-time saving state than in the non-time saving state, but also at least in the non-time saving state, the normal electric winning opening It is preferable that the game ball is configured so as to easily enter the ball in 2011.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first opening in which the game ball accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 easily passes through the first operation trigger region. The pattern, the second open pattern in which the game ball accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 easily passes through the second actuation trigger area, and the game ball accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 are the first actuation trigger area and the second. Three types of opening patterns (operation patterns) of the third opening pattern, which are difficult to pass through any of the operation trigger areas, are prepared.

Then, when a normal hit occurs in the time-saving state, the game ball is easily passed through the predetermined operation trigger area by being distributed to the first open pattern or the second open pattern. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a first time saving state and a second time saving state are prepared as a plurality of types of time saving states. In the first time saving state and the second time saving state, different distributions are made for the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a in the normal hitting state. For example, when the opening time is normal in the first time saving state, the first opening is performed. It is assumed that the distribution rate of the pattern is high (may be 100%), and that the distribution rate of the second open pattern is high (may be 100%) when a normal hit occurs in the second time saving state.

On the other hand, when a normal hit occurs in a non-time saving state, the game ball moves in a predetermined operation trigger area by adding not only the first open pattern and the second open pattern but also the distribution of the third open pattern. Either an opening mode (first opening pattern, second opening pattern) that is easy to pass through or an opening mode (third opening pattern) that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the predetermined operation trigger region is executed. That is, if a normal hit occurs in a non-time saving state, the game ball may be guided to the off-route. Details of the time saving state and the opening pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193 and the like.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, in the time-saving state, the winning probability of a normal hit is increased and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also shortened as compared with the case of the non-time-saving state. As a result, the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 can be brought into a state where the ball entry rate is improved so that it can easily operate in the open state. In this time-saving state, when the right-handed hit is continued, the game ball is accepted by the normal electric winning opening 2011, and the normal symbol change according to the normal judgment is likely to occur, and as a result, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b The game ball is accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and there is a tendency that the symbol variation of the special symbol according to the jackpot determination is easily executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, although the time saving state always occurs after the end of the big hit game, the next big hit game occurs when the type of the stopped big hit symbol (special symbol) is a predetermined probability variation symbol. On the other hand, when the type of the stopped jackpot symbol (special symbol) is not a predetermined probability variation symbol, the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times). It is supposed to end when.

The specification example of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is as follows. Eight kinds of numbers [1] to [8] are adopted as decorative symbols, and [111] [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] as jackpot symbols. Has been adopted. Further, as the winning probability of the big hit, 165/65536 in the low probability state and 1650/65536 in the high probability state are defined respectively. As the winning probability of a normal hit, 16384/65536 in the low probability state and 65535/65536 in the high probability state are defined, respectively. The number of prize balls for the game balls is as follows: the first starting winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. Three of them are specified for each of the big prize openings 2005. In addition, "10 balls" is specified as the maximum number of winnings, which is a closing condition of the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. Further, in each round game, "1 time" is set as the number of times the large winning opening 2005 is opened, and "8 balls" is set as the maximum number of winnings.

[6-2. Big hit game]
The jackpot game defined in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 190.

As shown in FIG. 190, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a random number for a big hit symbol acquired at the time of entering a ball (hereinafter, a symbol random number (hereinafter, a first special symbol random number, a second special symbol random number) ) Is assigned to any of the five types of jackpots, and the game privilege corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (determined jackpot type) (big hit game or game state after the jackpot game) Is to be given. Not only the game board side effect display device 1600, but also the first special hold number display 1404 in which the symbol variation related to the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side appears, and the symbol variation related to the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side appear. (Ii) The special symbol display 1405 also has a display mode (type of jackpot symbol) that can recognize which type of jackpot has been obtained.

Here, when the jackpot symbol corresponding to "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", and "4R normal jackpot" on the first special symbol side is stopped and displayed on the first special hold number indicator 1404, it is given. In the big hit game to be played, the big prize opening 2005 is opened in such a manner that the total number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player is relatively small (for example, 500 prize balls).

Then, when it is determined that either "4R probability variation jackpot A" or "4R probability variation jackpot B" on the first special symbol side has been obtained based on the symbol random number, the jackpot game for 4 rounds is played. After being executed, a probability variation state and a time reduction state (1st time reduction state in the case of 4R probability variation jackpot A and 2nd time reduction state in the case of 4R probability variation jackpot B) are given, which are continued until the next jackpot game occurs. It has become so. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "4R normal jackpot" on the first special symbol side has been obtained based on the symbol random number, the symbol of the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot game for 4 rounds is executed. If the next big hit game does not occur before the execution, a time saving state (first time saving state) is given to end the state, and a probability change state is not given.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game given when the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "16R probability variation jackpot" and "16R normal jackpot" on the second special symbol side is stopped and displayed on the second special hold number indicator 1405, the player The large prize opening 2005 is opened in such a manner that the total number of prize balls that can be obtained is relatively large (for example, 2000 prize balls). In the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, the number of times the round game is executed is increased or decreased (in the case of "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", and "4R normal jackpot", the round game is performed four times. It is decided to realize some of the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by executing "16R probability variation big hit" and "16R normal big hit", the round game is executed 16 times). The total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player may be realized by other methods such as differentiating the opening mode of the round game itself.

Then, when it is determined that the "16R probability variation jackpot" on the second special symbol side has been obtained based on the symbol random number, after the jackpot game for 16 rounds is executed, until the next jackpot game occurs. A continuous probability change state and a time saving state (second time saving state) are given respectively. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "16R normal jackpot" on the second special symbol side has been obtained based on the symbol random number, the symbol of the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot game for 16 rounds is executed. If the next big hit game does not occur before the execution, a time saving state (second time saving state) is given to end the state, and a probability change state is not given. In addition, in this embodiment, the determination of the winning type using such a symbol random number is made at the time of the jackpot determination, and the result of the determination (or the value of the determined symbol random number) fluctuates the special symbol. It is also used to determine the fluctuation time when making a random number.

In addition, the maximum time of each round game is "25 (seconds)" in each jackpot game, the number of times the big winning opening 2005 is opened in each round game is "1 time", and the maximum number of winnings in one round game is " "8 balls" are set respectively. In each jackpot game, the opening time is "10 (seconds)", the interval time between each round (inter-round interval) is "2 (seconds)", and the ending time is "15 (seconds)". It is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the privilege amount for the player differs between the first side symbol variation and the second side symbol variation regarding the control regarding the specified number of rounds and the game state in the jackpot game, and the first side symbol variation It is more advantageous when the jackpot symbol appears due to the variation of the second side symbol than when the jackpot symbol appears.

In the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, even when it is determined that "4R probability variation jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot" on the first special symbol side are obtained based on the symbol random number, the said. When the game state at the time of determination is the second time saving state, the time saving state generated after the end of the big hit game is not set to the first time saving state as shown in FIG. 190 (A), but is the second time saving state. The time may be shortened. That is, in this case, instead of shifting from the second time saving state to the first time saving state, the second time saving state is maintained. Therefore, in the second time saving state centered on the second special lottery, it happens by chance. , Even if the first special lottery is held such as when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 2002a and it becomes a big hit on the first special symbol side, the first is more disadvantageous than the second time saving state. It is possible to provide the privilege (big hit game) by the big hit without giving the player the disadvantage of being shifted to the time saving state, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[6-3. Control related to ordinary symbols]
As illustrated in FIG. 190, the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment can select the time saving state and the number of continuations thereof controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the type of the winning big hit. Therefore, depending on the type of jackpot, the control related to the normal symbol in the game after the jackpot game is completed can be changed, and when the normal hit is won, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 can be opened and closed. It is possible to change the operation.

In the following, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193, the control related to the ordinary symbol in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining an outline of control related to a normal symbol. According to FIG. 191, the winning probability of a normal hit is 1/99 at a low probability (for example, a normal gaming state), and the winning probability of a normal hit is at a high probability (first time saving state, second time saving state). It is said to be 98/99. Then, as an example of the symbol type selected at the time of normal hit, hit symbol 1, hit symbol 2, and hit symbol 3 are prepared, and depending on which hit symbol is selected, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 (strictly speaking). For example, an operation pattern related to the opening / closing operation of the movable member 2011a) is associated with the movable member 2011a.

Further, according to FIG. 191, the fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the symbol fluctuation of the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state of low probability time or high probability time, and specifically, the low probability time. Is 10 seconds, and 1 second at high probability. Further, the operation pattern of the distribution member 2011b in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is a constant fixed operation pattern regardless of the game state, winning or the like.

As illustrated in FIG. 191, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2011 associated with the hit symbol type (symbol type) selected at the time of normal hit is different between the low probability time and the high probability time. Furthermore, it is set to be different between the first time saving state and the second time saving state.

Specifically, first, when the probability is low, the first open pattern (distribution to the special 1 route) is executed when the hit symbol 1 is selected, and the second open pattern (distribution to the special 1 route) is executed when the hit symbol 3 is selected. Since the distribution to the special 2 route) is executed, the non-electric start winning opening (1st non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, 1st) corresponding to each route is performed by winning the game ball in the normal electric winning opening 2011. 2 Non-electric start winning opening 2004) can be expected to open. However, when the hit symbol 2 is selected, the third open pattern (distribution to the off-route) is executed, so even if the game ball is won in the normal electric winning opening 2011, the above non-electric start We cannot expect to open the winning openings.

That is, in the case of a normal hit at a low probability (normal game state), the degree of advantage in the subsequent development differs depending on what the hit symbol is, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. .. More specifically, the hit symbol 3 connected to the special 2 route has the highest degree of advantage, the hit symbol 1 connected to the special 1 route has the next highest degree of advantage, and the hit symbol 2 connected to the off-route has the lowest degree of advantage. ..

On the other hand, when there is a high probability, the first open pattern or the second open pattern is executed regardless of which of the winning symbols 1 to 3 is selected. Therefore, by making the normal electric winning opening 2011 win a game ball, It can be expected that either the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 will be opened. Here, focusing on the difference due to the time saving state, in the case of a normal hit in the first time saving state, the first opening pattern is always executed, so that the opening of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b can be expected (that is, the first). 1 You can get an opportunity to judge the big hit on the special symbol side). On the other hand, in the case of a normal hit in the second time saving state, since the second opening pattern is always executed, the opening of the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 can be expected (that is, the opportunity to determine the big hit on the second special symbol side). Can be earned).

Regarding the fixed operation pattern by the distribution member 2011b and each opening pattern by the movable member 2011a, an example of detailed movement will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

As described above, in FIG. 191, the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined based on the gaming state of low probability time or high probability time, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is based on more conditions. Ordinary symbol fluctuation time may be determined. Specifically, the "condition" here includes, for example, the winning of the ordinary lottery and the type of winning symbol.

FIG. 192 is an example of a table used when determining the normal symbol fluctuation time based on a plurality of conditions. FIG. 192 (A) shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation time determination table used when a winning result is derived at a low probability (normal game state), and the distribution differs depending on the type of winning symbol. It is selected from three types of fluctuation patterns (variation times are 10 seconds, 12 seconds, and 15 seconds). FIG. 192 (B) shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation time determination table used when a deviation result is derived at a low probability (normal game state), and has a uniform fluctuation time of 10 seconds. The variation pattern is selected.

When the tables illustrated in FIGS. 192 (A) and 192 (B) are used, different fluctuation times are selected depending on the result of the normal lottery (winning or symbol type) in the normal game state, so that the symbol variation of the normal symbol It is possible to diversify from the start to the stop of the game, and it is possible to enhance the game interest for the variable game with a normal pattern. Specifically, for example, in the case of an outlier, only a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected, so if it exceeds 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation of a normal symbol, it is possible to provide a situation in which a normal hit is confirmed before the fluctuation stops. It can be done, and the game entertainment can be enhanced. Further, for example, in the case of the longest fluctuation time of 15 seconds, there is a higher possibility that the stop symbol will be the winning symbol 3 than in the case where another fluctuation time is selected. The stop of the hit symbol 3 in the normal game state is the most advantageous hit symbol because it leads to the special 2 route distribution, and the longer the time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the higher the expectation of the player. ..

FIG. 192 (C) shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation time determination table used when a hit result is derived in a high probability time (first time saving state, second time saving state), and the hit symbol Regardless of the type, it is selected from two types of fluctuation patterns (variation time is 10 seconds and 12 seconds). FIG. 192 (D) shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation time determination table used when a deviation result is derived in a high probability time (first time saving state, second time saving state), and two types are shown. It is selected from fluctuation patterns (variation time is 1 second or 2 seconds).

When the tables illustrated in FIGS. 192 (C) and 192 (D) are used, if the result of the normal lottery is different in the first time saving state or the second time saving state, it is relatively 1 second or 2 seconds. By selecting a short normal symbol fluctuation time, it is possible to suppress the ratio of the period during which the normal electric winning opening 2011 is not opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the fixed operation pattern by the distribution member 2011b and each opening pattern by the movable member 2011a will be described in detail. Each of these operations is controlled by, for example, the main control board 1310.

The movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 performs an operation capable of taking an open state and a closed state according to an opening pattern determined based on a game state of a normal lottery, a hit type of a normal hit, and the like. The specific opening patterns are, for example, the first opening pattern to the third opening pattern described with reference to FIG. 191. In the non-time saving state, the first opening pattern to the third opening pattern are based on the normal hit stop symbol (winning symbol). One of the open patterns is selected and operates, and in the first time saving state, the first open pattern operates based on the normal hit, and in the second time saving state, the second open pattern is operated based on the normal hit. Works.

In FIG. 193, how the opening / closing operation (first open pattern to third open pattern) by the movable member 2011a and the distribution operation (fixed operation pattern) by the distribution member 2011b operate with the progress of time. Is shown in detail. In addition, in FIG. 193, it is assumed that each series of operations is performed with 6 seconds as one cycle. This means that when a normal hit is obtained, the normal hit game at the normal electric winning opening 2011 is performed in 6 seconds. However, this time is an example, and the time required for a series of opening and closing operations by the movable member 2011a is the game state (low probability time or high probability time) and the type of stop symbol per normal hit (hit symbols 1 to 3). It may be variable depending on any of) and the like. Specifically, for example, at the time of high probability, it may be set longer than at the time of low probability on average. As described above, even if various time settings are made for the opening / closing operation of the movable member 2011a, the distribution operation by the distribution member 2011b shall not change regardless of the normal hit, and the normal hit game Starting from the start time, it is controlled to always operate in one kind of fixed operation pattern (fixed operation pattern). Further, in the present embodiment, when the upper limit number of game balls wins in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 (for example, 8), the opening / closing control by the movable member 2011a is terminated (closed state) even during the opening / closing control. Will be).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a waiting time of a predetermined time may be provided between the time when the normal hit is confirmed and the time when the normal hit game is started at the normal electric winning opening 2011. In particular, in the normal game state where left-handed is recommended, it is necessary to switch to right-handed in order to perform the normal-hit game. It is preferable to leave a predetermined time. Further, in order to appropriately perform such switching, the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like is to execute an effect of teaching or foretelling a normal hit or an effect of recommending a temporary switch to right-handed. You may control it.

The symbols Ta to Tg shown in FIG. 193 indicate the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed when the start time of the normal hit game at the normal electric winning opening 2011 is 0 seconds, and specifically, Ta is 0. After seconds (at the start), Tb is after 0.05 seconds, Tc is after 1 second, Td is after 1.05 seconds, Te is after 2 seconds, Tf is after 4 seconds, and Tg is after 6 seconds (at the end). Is.

First, a fixed operation pattern by the distribution member 2011b will be described with reference to FIG. 193. As shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the distribution member 2011b is a member that is usually arranged inside the electric winning opening 2011 and can rotate within a certain range. Specifically, the distribution member 2011b has a stop position “right position” (“right” in FIG. 193) for the special 1 route for guiding the game ball to the first passage 2011d as shown in FIG. 116 (A). (Description) and the stop position "left position" (described as "left" in FIG. 193) for the special 2 route that guides the game ball to the second passage 2011e as shown in FIG. 116 (B). It is movable, and in the middle of such a rotation range, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the stop position "middle position" for the off-route that guides the game ball to the third passage 2011c (in FIG. 193). Described as "medium").

The stop position (initial position) when the distribution member 2011b does not perform the distribution operation is the right position for the special 1 route, but it may be the middle position for the off-route. Further, in FIG. 193, since the displacement of the stop position (left, middle, right) by the distribution member 2011b is shown as a model, the middle of switching the stop position is omitted. For example, in FIG. 193, when the stop position is shown to be instantaneously switched from "right" to "left", the stop position actually goes through the "middle" stop position during the switching. However, the distribution member 2011b is actually guided by the "middle" stop position (that is, the guidance to the third passage 2011c) by increasing the rotation speed or devising the shape. It's difficult. Further, even if the game ball is guided to a passage other than the target (in the above example, the “middle” third passage 2011c), it is subsequently directed to the target passage (“left” second passage 2011e in the above example). By stably guiding the game ball toward the ball, it is possible to cover the disadvantage of entering the off-route of the third passage 2011c.

The distribution member 2011b operates from the right position (FIG. 115 (A)) to the left position (FIG. 115 (B)) at the start of the normal hit game of Ta (0 seconds). Then, after an elapsed time of 50 ms, the Tb operates from the left position to the right position again. The staying time of 50 ms at the left position is a time during which it is difficult for the game ball to pass even if the movable member 2011a is in the open state, and the game ball is actually guided to the second passage 2011e. It is almost unpredictable that it will be done.

After moving to the right position at Tb, the distribution member 2011b continues to stop at the right position until Te, and then moves to the middle position at Te. Then, it operates to the left position at Tf after stopping for 2 seconds at the middle position, and further operates to the initial position (right position) at Tg after stopping for 2 seconds to end a series of fixed operations. After the series of fixing operations is completed, the distribution member 2011b is maintained in the initial position (right position) until the next normal hit game is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, each opening pattern by the movable member 2011a will be described in the order of the first opening pattern, the second opening pattern, and the third opening pattern. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal hit game, the distribution member 2011b operates in a fixed operation pattern, while the movable member 2011a operates in any of a plurality of open patterns, so that the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is used. It is possible to control the game ball to be entered and to control whether the entered game ball passes through any of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c.

In the explanation of the distribution operation of the distribution member 2011b, it is said that the passage of the game ball can hardly be assumed at the left stop position over 50 ms of Ta to Tb, but the opening and closing operation of the movable member 2011a also has 50 ms. The same can be said in the open state. That is, for example, during the 50 ms open state (Ta to Tb, Tc to Td) shown in the middle of the second open pattern and the third open pattern, the movable member 2011a opens for a moment, but the game ball is normal during this period. It will be difficult to enter the electric winning opening 2011. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the game ball hardly enters the normal electric winning opening 2011 in the open state in the above Ta to Tb and Tc to Td. Even if the game ball is accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 between Ta and Tb during the period, the distribution member 2011b during the period is in the left stop position, so that it is the most. It is possible to prevent being guided to the advantageous second passage 2011e.

First, in the case of the first opening pattern, an opening / closing operation is performed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 and pass through the first passage 2011d (which may be read as the first operation trigger area). (Special 1 route distribution).

Explaining in detail the operation of the first opening pattern shown in FIG. 193, the movable member 2011a operates from the closed state to the open state at Ta, which is the start of the normal hit game. After that, it operates from the open state to the closed state at Te 2 seconds later, and maintains the closed state thereafter.

According to such a first opening pattern, the period during which a right-handed game ball can enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 is limited to Ta to Te (0 seconds to 2 seconds later). Then, considering the fixed operation pattern of the distribution member 2011b at this time, the game ball that has entered the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 will almost certainly be placed in the first passage 2011d by the distribution member 2011b stopped at the right stop position. Be guided. Then, when the game ball passes through the first passage 2011d, it passes through the first operation trigger region, so that the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened. As a result, the player can receive the first special lottery at an arbitrary timing by letting the player enter the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b.

That is, when the movable member 2011a operates in the first open pattern, the right-handed game ball is easily entered into the normal electric winning opening 2011 during the period from Ta to Tb, and the ball is further entered. It is possible to control the game ball so that it can easily pass through the first operation trigger area, and as a result, not only the normal electric winning opening 2011 but also the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b can be easily opened. Can be made feasible.

In the above, it was stated that "the game ball is almost certainly guided to the first passage 2011d", but strictly speaking, the ball passes through the movable member 2011a at the timing immediately before Te and enters the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. When the displacement of the stop position of the distribution member 2011b starts, the game ball may be guided to the middle route (off route) and pass through the third passage 2011c. However, since such cases are rare and do not affect many people, the description of similar cases will be omitted hereafter.

Next, in the case of the second opening pattern, the opening / closing operation for making it easier for the game ball to enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 and pass through the second passage 2011e (which may be read as the second operation trigger area) is performed. It is done (special 2 route distribution).

Explaining in detail the operation of the second opening pattern shown in FIG. 193, the movable member 2011a temporarily operates from the closed state to the open state for 50 ms from Ta to Tb when the normal hit game starts. Then, the closed state is maintained from Tb to Tc, and the closed state is temporarily changed to the open state again for 50 ms from Tc to Td. After that, the operating member 011a maintains a closed state from Td to Tf. However, as described above, it is rare for a game ball to enter the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 during such an opening period of 50 ms.

After that, at Tf 4 seconds after the start of the normal hit game, the movable member 2011a operates in the open state, maintains the open state for 2 seconds until Tg, and then shifts to the closed state for a series of series. End the operation.

According to such a second opening pattern, the period during which a right-handed game ball can enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 is limited to approximately Tf to Tg (4 seconds to 6 seconds later). Then, considering the fixed operation pattern of the distribution member 2011b at this time, the game ball that has entered the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 will almost certainly enter the second passage 2011e by the distribution member 2011b stopped at the left stop position. Be guided. Then, when the game ball passes through the first passage 2011e, it passes through the second operation trigger region, so that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened. As a result, the player can receive the second special lottery at any timing by letting the player enter the second non-electric start winning opening 2004.

That is, when the movable member 2011a operates in the second open pattern, the right-handed game ball is easily entered into the normal electric winning opening 2011 in the period of Tf to Tg, and the ball is further entered. It is possible to control the game ball so that it can easily pass through the second operation trigger area, and as a result, not only the normal electric winning opening 2011 but also the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 can be easily opened. Can be made feasible.

Next, in the case of the third open pattern, an opening / closing operation is performed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 and pass through the third passage 2011c (off-route route distribution).

Explaining in detail the operation of the third opening pattern shown in FIG. 193, the movable member 2011a temporarily operates from the closed state to the open state for 50 ms from Ta to Tb when the normal hit game starts. Then, the closed state is maintained from Tb to Tc, and the closed state is temporarily changed to the open state again for 50 ms from Tc to Td. After that, the operating member 011a maintains a closed state at Td to Tfe. However, as described above, it is rare for a game ball to enter the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 during such an opening period of 50 ms.

After that, the movable member 2011a operates in the open state in Te 2 seconds after the start of the normal hit game, maintains the open state for 2 seconds until Tf, shifts to the closed state, and then closes. Maintain the state.

According to such a third opening pattern, the period during which a right-handed game ball can enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 is limited to approximately Te to Tf (2 seconds to 4 seconds later). Then, considering the fixed operation pattern of the distribution member 2011b at this time, the game ball that has entered the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is almost certainly placed in the third passage 2011c by the distribution member 2011b stopped at the middle stop position. Be guided. Then, when the game ball passes through the third passage 2011c, it does not pass through either the first operation trigger area or the second operation trigger area, so that only the prize ball for the entry of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 It will be paid out.

That is, when the movable member 2011a operates in the third open pattern, the right-handed game ball is easily entered into the normal electric winning opening 2011 during the period from Te to Tf, and the ball is further entered. It is possible to control the game ball so that it is difficult to pass through any of the operating trigger areas, and it is possible to realize a mere winning of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by selecting the opening operation by the movable member 2011a based on the game state of the normal lottery, the hit type of the normal hit, etc., the normal electric winning opening 2011 in the normal hit game It is possible to control the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball and the flow path (first passage 2011d, second passage 2011e, third passage 2011c) of the entered game ball.

It should be noted that another method may be adopted for the time for which the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is maintained in the open state. However, regardless of how much the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is maintained in the open state, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is predetermined from the time when the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is opened. When the specified number of game media are accepted, the closed state is operated at that time no matter how short the open state is maintained.

[6-4. Transition of game state]
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be collectively described below with reference to FIG. 194, based on the operations of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 and the like described so far.

According to FIG. 194, the gaming state can be broadly classified into a normal gaming state (non-time saving state) and a time saving gaming state (time saving state), and the first time saving state among the time saving gaming states. And the second time saving state can be further classified. In addition, it can be classified that the normal gaming state includes a special state.

First, in the non-time saving state (normal game state), since the normal lottery is performed with a low probability, there is less chance that the normal electric winning opening 2011 will be opened as a normal hit than in the time saving state. Further, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are basically in a closed state. When aiming at these ordinary electric winning openings 2011, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004, a right-handed game is effective (see FIG. 114), but for the above reasons, In the normal game state, the game mainly right-handed has little profit. Therefore, in the normal game state, basically, a game method is adopted in which a game ball is won in the first start winning opening 2002a by left-handed, and a big hit is won by the big hit judgment on the first special symbol side. Is beneficial. However, in this case, the specified number of rounds is "4 times" even if the jackpot game is performed after the jackpot is won and the first side symbol change is executed. In this non-time saving state, it is confirmed that it is a non-probable change state.

However, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a feature that a normal lottery is performed by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2003b even when left-handed in a normal game state. Then, when a normal hit is obtained, the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened in a manner in which a game ball can enter (see FIGS. 191 and 193). Therefore, at such an opening timing, a game method in which a game ball is inserted into the normal electric winning opening 2011 by right-handed hitting is also useful even in the normal game state.

When a normal hit is obtained in the normal game state as described above, when the first open pattern or the second open pattern is selected as the opening operation by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011, it is normal by right-handed hitting. By controlling the game ball that has entered the electric winning opening 2011 to pass through the first operating trigger area or the second operating trigger area, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b or the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 can be in the open state (“special state” shown in FIG. 194). In such a special state, the player can execute a special lottery by hitting right at an arbitrary timing and inserting the game ball into the non-electric start winning opening in the open state.

Here, in particular, when a normal hit is obtained in the normal game state and the second opening pattern by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is selected, the game ball that has entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 by right-handed hitting. It is controlled to pass through the second operation trigger region, and as a result, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 can be opened. In such a situation, the second non-open state is reached despite the normal gaming state in which the player aims to win the jackpot by the jackpot judgment (first side symbol variation) on the first special symbol side. By hitting the game ball into the electric start winning opening 2004 by hitting the right side, it is possible to execute the second side symbol change which is more advantageous than the first side symbol change at an arbitrary timing, so that the second side symbol change in the normal game state. It is possible to realize a special game opportunity to aim for a big hit on the special symbol side.

Next, in the first time-saving state, there are more chances that the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened than in the non-time-saving state, and it is easier for the game ball to win a prize. The game ball that has entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 in the first time saving state is guided to the first passage 2011d (first operation trigger area) by the special 1 route distribution. Therefore, the player makes the normal electric winning opening 2011 win a game ball by hitting right, and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b is opened by passing the game ball through the first operation trigger region. It is useful to adopt a game method that aims to win a big hit by the big hit judgment on the first special symbol side by making the game ball win by further right-handed hitting. However, in this case, the specified number of rounds is "4 times" even if the jackpot game is performed after the jackpot is won and the first side symbol change is executed. In addition, in this first time saving state, there is a possibility that a probable change state is given.

Next, in the second time saving state, as in the first time saving state, there are more chances that the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened than in the non-time saving state, and the game ball is easy to win. In addition, the game ball that has entered the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 in the second time saving state is guided to the second passage 2011e (second operation trigger area) by the special 2 route distribution. For this reason, the player makes the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 win a game ball by hitting right, and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 is opened by passing the game ball through the second operation trigger area. It is useful to adopt a game method that aims to win a big hit in the big hit judgment on the second special symbol side by making the game ball win by further right-handed hitting. However, in this case, the specified number of rounds is "16 times" when the jackpot game occurs after the jackpot is won and the second side symbol change is executed. In addition, in this second time saving state, there is a possibility that a probable change state is given.

In this way, even when there are a time saving state and a non-time saving state, and even when the time saving state is similarly given, the game ball winning the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 passes through the first operation trigger area. Different games can be provided depending on whether the first time saving state is easy to perform or the second time saving state is easy to pass through the second operation trigger region.

In addition, in the non-time saving state and the first time saving state, the first side symbol fluctuation is executed, so if the jackpot is won, the second time saving has a 30% probability (see FIG. 190 (A), 4R probability variation jackpot B). The state shifts to the first time saving state with a probability of 70% (see FIG. 190 (A), 4R probability variation jackpot A, 4R normal jackpot). In addition, out of 70% of the 70% that shifts to the first time saving state, the time saving state and the probability changing state are given until the next big hit with a probability of 50% (see FIG. 190 (A), 4R probability variation jackpot A), and a probability of 20% (see FIG. 190 (A)). Refer to FIG. 190 (A), the time saving state is given a predetermined number of times in 4R normal jackpot), and the probability variation state is not given. On the other hand, in the second time saving state, the second side symbol fluctuation is executed, so if the jackpot is won, there is a 100% probability (see FIG. 190 (B), 16R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot). The time saving state is maintained. Further, when the second time saving state is maintained, the time saving state and the probability changing state are given until the next big hit with an 80% probability (see FIG. 190 (B), 16R probability variation jackpot), and a 20% probability (FIG. 190 (Fig. 190). Refer to B), the time saving state is given a predetermined number of times in 16R normal jackpot), and the probability change state is not given.

In this way, in the second time saving state, the total number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game when the big hit is obtained becomes larger than in the case of being controlled in the non-time saving state and the first time saving state. In addition, since there is a high possibility that the game will be controlled to the second time saving state after the end of the big hit, it is considered to be a game condition that is significantly more advantageous than the non-time saving state and the first time saving state. Further, in the first time saving state and the second time saving state, the case where the game shifts to the non-time saving state when the variable game of a predetermined number of times is completed is the case where the probability changing state is not given, and the gaming state is maintained. If it is done, it is confirmed that the probability change state is given.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first time saving state, the first open pattern is selected at the time of normal hitting, so that the fluctuation of the first side symbol is promoted, whereas in the second time saving state, it is normal hitting. Since the second open pattern is selected at that time to promote the fluctuation of the second side symbol, once it is controlled to the second time saving state, it is easy to be continuously controlled to the second time saving state, which is very advantageous. It is a game condition. Specifically, when controlled to the second time saving state, even if the special symbol fluctuates 100 times after the jackpot game in which the "16R normal jackpot" is won by the second side symbol fluctuation, the next jackpot As long as the game is not won, the second time saving state will continue.

In this way, after winning the big hit in the non-time saving state and shifting to the first time saving state and suppressing the decrease of the game ball, the big hit is won while the first time saving state is given and the second time saving state is given. Shifting to a state is a realistic game flow in which a large number of balls can be obtained. Of course, while the non-time saving state may directly shift to the second time saving state, in the first time saving state and the second time saving state, the predetermined number of time saving states are completed without winning the jackpot. It may shift to a non-time saving state. In particular, according to the present embodiment, in a part of the case where a hit is obtained by a normal lottery in a non-time saving state (normal game state) (specifically, a 20% probability that the winning symbol 3 is selected). Since the normal electric winning opening 2011 is controlled to perform the opening operation by the special 2 route distribution, the opportunity of the 2nd side symbol fluctuation can be given as a realistic possibility, and the 2nd special symbol side which is extremely advantageous. You can expect the player to hit the jackpot at.

In addition, a special lottery was drawn by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2002 (first starting winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. If the lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous game state, the large winning opening 2005 accepts the game ball in a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the lapse of the special fluctuation time. Is possible. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, by having the large winning opening 2005 accept the game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

In the present embodiment, it is special by accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2002 (first starting winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. From the start of the lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery, the first start opening 2002 (first start winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting opening (second non-entry opening) When the game ball is accepted in the electric start winning opening) 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is the first starting port 2002 (first starting winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. On the other hand, the upper limit is four for each, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 (first starting winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening). Mouth) Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

[6-5. Others]
The above-mentioned suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 is displayed according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side production display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit, back bottom rear movable production unit, back top left movable production unit, back left movable production unit, back It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the upper middle movable effect unit, the back lower front movable effect unit, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the above is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the peripheral edge of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Decorative part 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped decoration, first button decorative part 411a and door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped decoration, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with a sense of decoration, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be machine 1.

Further, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second by changing the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432 g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) with the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) inside the operation button, the first decorative body is used. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 will be operated to move the distance. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the state, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with and is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the central side of the button lens 411 not provided with the first button decoration portion 411a. The decorative member 432 inside the operation button on the back side (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration portion 411a is radial. The decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame inside the operation button is passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432 g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 when viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. it can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432 g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432 g. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) inside the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button are on. The interior decoration board 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are light-emitting and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED477a), whereas the first button decoration unit 411a is decorated inside the second button. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button internal decoration portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent and decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emittingly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button are not required. The second effect display device on the side (460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and the size can be increased so that the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device on the door frame side) can be enlarged. 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the outside of the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside of the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from becoming frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, below the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410, which is movable (advance / retreat) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the operation button interior decoration that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. In the pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at the position where the storage plate of the game ball stands out, so the player can see it at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, which are provided with the part 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for luminescent decoration of the frame side lens 417. It includes an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can prevent the light from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. it can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative part Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently separated. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. The wiring connected to the right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b The luminous decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration unit 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately emitting light of the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that allow only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f of the operation button 410 The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be displayed through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LED 422a and 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a good state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button is decorated in front of the outer portion of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be made difficult to see by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emittingly decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and light emission in which the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect, the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can not get bored with the various light emission effects, and the player can enjoy it. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size of installation space behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 is extended to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game ball, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. it can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate second region A2 extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends upward from the upper end of the mounting space 326j toward the remaining space side. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), which reduces the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. It is possible to suppress the decrease of.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate main body 325 on the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening). When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), reduce interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. This pachinko machine It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to accept the game ball into the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, and the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in a space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small to be inconspicuous. it can. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate are visible, so that the player can see the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). it can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient storage amount of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340, 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second) with different rearward protrusions. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the effect operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where more game balls are loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is located below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed such that a game ball is received in a general winning opening 2001 or the like. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction while having 321 and the lower plate 322. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player can play the game in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the cushioning portion 322d, the portion between the ball pulling hole 322a, the lower plate ball pulling hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, it is probable that the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a from the front. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 that can be seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are brought into the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, and discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to surely make the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player is made to think that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured as in the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 that bulges forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to accept the game ball into the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction is recessed on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit mounting unit 326a can be made to appear to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect) can be made to appear. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in a position where the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Since a part of the game ball is wrapped around the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the storage amount of the game balls (volume of the lower plate 322) in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, entertain the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. The rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like can be made difficult to touch. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by touch, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decline in interest. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), a sufficient storage amount of the game ball can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. It is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips and the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 and the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be moved from the player side. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make it stand out more and attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, it is possible to entertain the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a sense of humor, and you can dedicate the player to the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting an effect to a player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The outer diameter of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 that is about 15 cm in length and whose center bulges away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 that is provided with a one-button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412, and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since it is provided, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player can improve the appearance. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) becomes relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative portion 411a or the like, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented from deteriorating the appearance. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a tubular shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide the objects outside the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical body shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in an inclined state with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is made to stand out and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque from the outer peripheral end to the inside of the button lens 411 with a predetermined width over the entire circumference is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and it is possible to secure a space for moving them. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer circumference has no directionality as compared with the case of having a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when the player participates in the operation. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces his interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the production, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 410 by the production image and the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , By actively participating the player in the player participation type production and entertaining it, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachislot machine or the gaming machine obtained by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a tubular shape toward the two base units 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display devices 460A may project toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, etc. on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It may be set to 322, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You may be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedral shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "Equipped with an operating device", "Equipped with a rotating body with a decoration on the surface", "A thing with a decorative body with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and decorations that imitate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the concept of the game machine , Etc. are decorated by stickers, printing, etc. ”, etc., and members such as units or panels may be attached. Further, the member to be attached to the attachment space 326j (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a which is open forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is not limited to, but is a dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It is desirable that the front surface of such a dish unit cover be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the game machine by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion covers an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322. An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in viewing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction in an arc shape. The second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member of the display device 460A or the like is shown so as to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is subject to predetermined conditions. A configuration having a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible by satisfying the above may be used. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". The rear side can be seen by becoming opaque or opaque. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in the normal state can be seen, and thus the front member. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be made less bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under a normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member can be seen. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. Therefore, on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or luminescent and decorated) by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of luminescent effects and decorative effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 128. FIG. 123 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 125 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 127 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 128 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, + 5V) as shown in FIG. 123. A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to the game being advanced by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310, as the first control unit MCG, A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit MCG. The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 123. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, and various control programs such as a main control program that is executed and controls game operations. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. The program mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watch dock timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "main control built-in") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is set in advance). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (1 value within a predetermined numerical range) as an initial value and is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball entering the second start port 2004, and the general one shown in FIG. 114. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Is entered in. Further, as shown in FIG. 114, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and a game accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. The detection signals from the Fuden winning sensor 4006 that detects the ball and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet are the panels attached to the game board 5. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 4161 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the normal figure solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, and the distribution solenoid 2109 via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function passes through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. (I) Special symbol display 1403, second special symbol indicator 1405, first special hold number indicator 1404, second special hold number indicator 1406, ordinary symbol display 1402, status indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407. It outputs a drive signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Main control with reset function By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 133). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. See 133). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 129) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 124, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. ) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 124, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs including a payout control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. To output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 103. The payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 are provided. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watch dock timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is reset by resetting the payout control system, which will be described later, to output various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like. It is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball out detection sensor 827 that detects the out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 bc without the reset function, thereby payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal for display on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, the payout detection sensor 842 is defective based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). Is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330. It is output to the equal rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental device return display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to a predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. Input to the input terminal of the input port, the payout control MPU952a determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU952a uses the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards of the above is also relayed (to be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball rental display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the rental balance display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

In the ball rental button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and one of these three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven by one digit segment indicator, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on are the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input is made via the plate 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the vessel can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends an EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal to output to the CR unit 6 or to inform that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or not, is sent to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island facility and capable of electrically connecting or electrically disconnecting an AC 24 volt (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 953 that controls launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power ratio of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improving circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly comprises a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the player is touching or a finger, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. It controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 while controlling the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour, minute, and second that specify the date. The real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds the time information that specifies the above, and the knob unit is operated to rotate the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is provided with a volume adjusting volume 1510a which is adjusted by the above.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emitting modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states, and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. ”) And.

Peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a period of time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal of is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the effect operation unit detection serial I / O port via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to independently transfer data between devices without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae with peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 1511ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to transfer data independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier boards, and frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it resets in hardware. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the watch dock timer is started and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watch dock timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.

As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is done is read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information in a range of 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. And the game state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is a production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a of "(1fr)" Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for LEDs on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 It is a storage area in which the door-side light emitting data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap or the like is provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set. In the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are set. Dial created based on various information (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400) obtained by acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the above. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the effect display drive board 4450 is peripheral to the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511ca of Bank0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. To. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store a copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cc has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr), and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 143). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) While it can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and special effect flags), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is backed up in "(SRAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (RAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing the one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In addition, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Speaker) 1512a with built-in sound source, various sound such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial to the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The converted drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. A speaker IC 1512d for directing the door frame side to transmit, and a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. , In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. I have. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized by the player. Main body frame back image data used for displaying the main body frame back image, service mode screen display The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 128 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display arranged in the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path of is extremely long as compared with the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is equipped with "V-by-One (V-by-One) of THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential communication system called "registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential).
While a differential interface based on a serial system called Signaling is used, channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side production transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 to display image data for the effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The built-in sound source VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, in the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b is stored as shown in FIG. 128. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound sources. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined to obtain the volume of the combined production sound. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the combined production sound volume is actually combined with the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified master volume value is amplified, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sound used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined and this is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound. The sound data of the track in which is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound is forcibly set to mute. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed. If the setting mode is entered and adjusted by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, the production is produced. Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It has come to start flowing again from.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 128, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, which is not shown in the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 128, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is input with drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronous signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is obtained from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.

Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged as a unit in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility are integrated. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise that has invaded the machine.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential paired cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, which means that the length of wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Even if it adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Inc. and is less susceptible to noise, the configuration with such hardware alone will result in electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d uses a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the door frame side effect display device 460 can reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 3, various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings, the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4 to maintain the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twist pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, separated by a predetermined dimension from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates called a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twist pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cables, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and of the harness, the power supply wire is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is input as a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, various serialized effects are generated. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a considers that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 It can be determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320 has no problem, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is transmitted to that effect. (Please call the clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. Based on the effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Day, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting volume 1510a is changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is attached to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. The notification sound for, etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and from the mute. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation portion 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and cases where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume adjusting volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the production operation unit 400 You can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to the desired level, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, is waiting for a customer, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game will use the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 129. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GNDs) of various substrates and the grounds (GNDs) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same grounds (GNDs).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 129, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volt (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the firing solenoid 682 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 which are in the forward direction by the diode PD0. Current flows toward and toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned from the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 129, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages, + 24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are peripheral through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 130A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 130 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 128, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other substrates other than the main control substrate 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

In the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 are supplied via the payout control board 951, and the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V are monitored. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 130 (b) via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative substrate of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage to be output, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. FIG. 131 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 132 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 133 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 129 will be described, and then the power supply, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 123 and 129. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 131, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 131, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 131, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 131, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, in addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit in which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which is HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 131, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal that is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 123, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 132, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitoring voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC 22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 132, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22 to + 24V, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 become the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
Monitoring of a + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 132, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25 to + 12V, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and performs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same as the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip-flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes, the state of outputting the signal whose logic is HI from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal which inverts the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic. Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal can be used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure warning signal, and outputs the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 132, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip flot. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 132. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose end is grounded to ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 124 on the payout control board 951 In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. By doing so, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 132. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is shown. In the above, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22. There is no reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is paid out to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 951 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 131. At the RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 is received as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 123. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and a main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with respect to the normal figure solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the normal diagram solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 123 are displayed. The drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 131 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310aea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 131 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal for the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and when the transistor MTR50 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Even if the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be interrupted and to prevent the command from being missing, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate missing commands immediately after a power failure occurs or during a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. Therefore, 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a function, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and is missing. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 139. FIG. 134 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit and the like, FIG. 135 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 135, and FIG. 137 is a payout motor drive. The circuit diagram shows a circuit, FIG. 138 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 139 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control unit circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 134, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each of them, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 to be smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will cause a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples by the capacitor PC3 and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control circuit]
The payout control unit 952 resets the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, and as peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. 134. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
The + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 as shown in FIG. 134. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 134, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b is input with a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 124. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 124, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be described, then the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 by the pull-up resistor PR20 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF according to the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) in a state where the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 by the pull-up resistor PR28 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via a resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, so that the logic is changed. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer is based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that the player who is playing the door has a state that does not occur during the normal game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side by turning on the transistor PTR40 by raising the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance PR40. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a, while When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed by the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side in 951 and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise invades the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage described above by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body breaks down. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the 4th terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the first-stage and second-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the second-stage transistor PTR43 changes, and the signal becomes the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 131 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the latter stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56 and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is turned on, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the PTR42 is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is being operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 137, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to and input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 125 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to the game ball rental device. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible via the terminal board 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 138, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 134 via the ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is changed, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as the CR connection signal 1.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, so that the transistor PTR70 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, so that the transistor PTR71 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. To.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, so that the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 bc to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXE output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 134, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the signals 1 and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 124 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to the above, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 139.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power failure warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots in which 15 rounds have occurred (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, the 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. Absent.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 includes an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is obtained every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and the main prize ball number information output signals are various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game ball entered in, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal indicating that the variation display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting port winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 140, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green to output an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. This is a signal to convey that, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in the present embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and the number of times is counted to count the number of times, and the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal is input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times that the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has received a 15-round jackpot.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In this embodiment, output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and the hall computer displays the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times has been counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is red and outputs an information output signal during a short time. As described above, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. In addition to being able to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time saving, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. In addition to being able to grasp that there is, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered in various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having the connector provided in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center to the right side, in this respect as well, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is because, for example, in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720. If a 15-round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the number of pachinko machines is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, in the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each case, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk in the hall, for example, checks the hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying the game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball clogging (also, it occurs in the payout device 830, for example). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball hose) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working, the game is being played by the main control board 1310, so after the 15 rounds of big hits are completed, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15-round big hit is completed and the 15-round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 as prize balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are displayed. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the number of game balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 141 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 141, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly comprises the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128 by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 together with the positive signal. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, it is restored to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two differential signals, the positive signal and the negative signal, are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so that it does. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , The peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 and the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned THine Electronics Inc. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application paper, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logical) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V power supply line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned As described above, the OE terminal is grounded to the ground so that the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, but for some reason, it is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a connects to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal plate 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the doors. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is peripheral. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that conveys that the data output from the D0 terminals to the D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, is valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal are three video signals (18), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that when an electronic component is surface-mounted, it is advantageous in that the hardware circuit can be suitably miniaturized by integration. However, for integrated circuit components among electronic components (components in which multiple types of single-function elements (resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc.) are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package), Due to its nature, the package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which one single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package), so that a relatively large space is created on the back side of the package. The space on the back side of such a package becomes a place (a place where electronic parts (illegal parts) are likely to be illegally mounted) that is difficult to visually confirm in the surface mount state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate or the like) instead of surface mounting for many years.

That is, the electronic components to be inserted and mounted tend to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place that can be easily visually confirmed even in the mounted state, so that unauthorized components can be mounted. It is made to be suppressed favorably.

However, in recent years, in the field of amusement machines, the space used for production has been further increased in size, and the hardware circuit has been downsized while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. There is an increasing demand for planning.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 123, the second control unit SCG that only controls the effect related to the game. In view of the fact that the second control unit SCG is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is unlikely to be the target of fraud, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to the present embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 123. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit parts and various discrete parts mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform a progress process of the effect according to the result of the progress process of the game. Is made feasible.

Here, as various integrated circuit components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the like are included. Further, as various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, there are resistors AR10 and AR11 shown in FIG. 133, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the like.

In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to the present embodiment, the lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510). Only the surface mount area mounted in is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMDs) are also used as the various electronic components described above of the peripheral control board 1510. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are not easily targeted for fraud, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic components is not deteriorated. It becomes possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. Then, the first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base boards of the boards 1310, 951, 931 to supply the control power supply (for example, + 5V). It is said that processing related to the game, including generation processing and payout of prize balls, can be executed. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the granting of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG is likely to be subject to fraud. Therefore, although it is required to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and the game will be enjoyed. The reality is that the decline is inevitable.

However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on the base plate (base board of main control board 1310, base board of payout control board 951, base board of power supply board 931). Discrete parts among various electronic parts have a smaller package than integrated circuit parts, and even if an electronic part is illegally mounted on the back side, it can be easily confirmed visually. It can be said that it is a component having relatively high performance as a security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

That is, the inventor has found that among the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG, components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components) are mixed. Focusing on this, if further integration as a hardware circuit is attempted using only components with high security performance against fraud (discrete components), even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is easily subject to fraud, We have found that it is possible to reduce the size of hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

FIG. 188 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with parts (discrete parts) having high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 188, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of electronic components even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is easily subject to fraud. Explain that.

As shown in FIG. 188, the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. Note that FIG. 188 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. For example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate. It is configured to include three base substrates, a base substrate of 951 and a base substrate of a power supply substrate 931. An example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. As a matter of fact, first, for convenience of explanation, an example in which they are composed of one base substrate will be described.

Here, on the base plate BB,
-The insertion mounting area TH, in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance,
-The lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the surface mount area SM is excellent in integration performance due to multi-stage stacking of wiring patterns, but is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both of them are provided in a divided form.

With such a configuration, while electronic components that are difficult to be fraudulent can be mounted in the surface mounting area SM, electronic components that should pursue fraud suppression rather than integration are mounted on the insertion mounting area TH side. Since it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, it is possible to preferably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as the various electronic components D described above,
-Integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance against unauthorized mounting, which is enclosed in a relatively large package in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated.
-The single-function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and is equipped with a discrete component D2 having high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

In this regard, as a characteristic first technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance is subjected to the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting. It is mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH which is excellent in fraud suppression performance among the area SM, and only the discrete component having high security performance is mounted in the surface mounting area SM which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of electronic components even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is liable to be the target of fraud.

Further, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 188, as the discrete component D2 having high security performance, a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM and a discrete component D2a. It has an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

That is, as described above, with respect to electronic components, it is generally possible to achieve integration by using a surface mount type rather than an insert mount type. However, when both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separately provided as the base plate BB, for example, in terms of circuit design, the position where the electrically connected integrated circuit component D1 is provided. In addition, in consideration of the space where the wiring pattern related to this is provided, it is better to arrange the electronic components in the insertion mounting area TH instead of the surface mounting area SM so that the integration can be reversed. Cases can occur.

In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, not all of the discrete parts D2 are used as surface mount type discrete parts D2a, but one of them so as to be the most suitable mode for integration. The insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is intentionally used in the part. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized more favorably while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 188, even in the discrete component D2 having high security performance, the capacitor element having a large capacitance value (backup power supply) among the capacitor elements. The surface mount area SM is relatively larger than other elements (resistor elements, diode elements, capacitor elements with a small capacitance value (for filter circuits, etc.), etc.). It is not used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the above, but is prepared only as the insert mount type discrete component D2b-C mounted on the insert mounting area TH. As a result, in order to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, it becomes possible to more preferably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

However, although a capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete parts), a large gap is not created between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit component D1. .. Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

Moreover, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, a characteristic second technique is inherent, which is based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. There is.

That is, as shown in FIG. 188, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, one hardware circuit for the purpose of exerting a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function) is provided. , A discrete circuit (hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure composed of a plurality of discrete components D2 mounted in a form divided into an insertion mounting region TH and a surface mounting region SM.

That is, in this case, although it is one discrete circuit DHC aimed at exerting a specific electrical function (for example, backup power supply function), it is mounted on the base plate BB in the insertion mounting area TH. The electronic component D2b having a shape that makes it possible and the electronic component D2a that has a shape that makes it possible to mount the surface mount region SM will be mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recall the fact that there is a problem, and it is possible to expect suppression of fraud by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic components on the surface mount area SM, it is possible to expect the hardware circuit to be downsized.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud against electronic components.

However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 188 is for explaining the principle of the two characteristic techniques according to the present application. Therefore, next, the example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application will be described. explain.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes a base plate of the main control board 1310, a base board of the payout control board 951, and a base board of the power supply board 931. It is configured to have three base substrates of. Then, both the through-hole mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on these base boards in a separated manner.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, of the three base boards, only the through-hole mounting region TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931, and the base board of the main control board 1310 is formed. And the base board of the payout control board 951, both the through-hole mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided so as to be separated from each other.

Then, among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 of the above-mentioned "backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM" (FIG. 129). (See) is mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a on the surface mount region SM of the base board of the main control board 1310. Similarly to this, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 129) in the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the RAM with built-in payout control” is surface-mounted on the base board of the above-mentioned payout control board 951. It is mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a on the region SM.

According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance and the discrete component D2 having high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a. It will be mounted on the surface mount area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951), respectively. As a result, even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is easily subject to fraud, it becomes possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the fraudulent mounting of electronic components (). The characteristic first technology according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, the surface mount region SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is a specific type of discrete component (here, the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are both Schottky. Only a plurality of diode elements) will be mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mount area SM, which are inferior in fraud suppression performance, have the same shape, it is expected that the labor required for fraud confirmation can be saved.

Further, in the above configuration, the discrete component (electronic component that plays a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have is intentionally mounted on a board (main control board 1310) different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mount area SM on the power supply board 931, the surface mount area SM is formed on another board and mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function. The plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted in the insertion mounting region TH (capacitor element) and the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), respectively. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, although it is one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting the backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board) is on the base plate BB. The electronic component D2b having a shape that enables mounting on 931) and the electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) are mixed. become. Therefore, when the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is visually recognized by a third party, they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recall the fact that there is a problem, and it is possible to expect suppression of fraud by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit (the second characteristic technique according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting the backup power supply function are inserted into the insertion mounting area TH (condenser element). And the surface mounting area SM (shot key diode element) are not only mounted separately, but these discrete components D2 are mounted on two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (shot key diode element), power supply board. It is supposed to be mounted separately on 931 (condenser element). That is, in this case, the electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. Therefore, the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be further increased, and the suppression of fraud can be further expected.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 188, the mounting surface of the surface mounting region SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the insertion mounting region TH of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so that the area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mount area SM having inferior fraud suppression performance is provided, and suppression of fraudulent activity can be expected.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 188, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mount region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is determined by the number of types of electronic components mounted on the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH in the BB. Therefore, the types of electronic components to be visually checked to see if any illegal acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mount area SM, which is relatively inferior in security performance, are relatively reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to facilitate the visual check.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 188, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mount region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is determined in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components to be visually checked to see if any illegal acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mount area, which is relatively inferior in security performance, is relatively reduced. , The load on the visual check can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the surface mount area SM is provided on the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951, respectively, but is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931. You may.

Further, the surface mount region SM is formed only on a specific base board, and the surface mount type discrete component D2 that should be originally mounted on another base board is also arranged together on the specific base board. May be good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not improper mounting is performed, it is only necessary to focus on the surface mount area SM formed on a specific base board, so that fraud confirmation can be performed. It is expected that the time and effort required will be saved.

However, considering that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the above three base boards, at least the through-hole mounting region TH must be formed on all three base boards in order to appropriately suppress fraud. Must be.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is assumed that it is composed of one base substrate, as shown schematically in FIG. 188, they may be configured together on one base substrate.

Further, the "base plate BB of the first control unit MCG" according to the present application may be any one in which the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH are separated, and this is provided by a plurality of base boards. It may be provided by one base substrate.

For example, as the base board of the main control board 1310, a first base board in which only the through-hole mounting area TH is formed and a second base board in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed are provided, and the second base is provided. By inserting and mounting the board in the through-hole mounting area TH of the first base board, the electrons mounted in the first base board are inserted and mounted while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It can be assumed that a structure is adopted in which the components and the electronic components surface-mounted on the second base board are electrically connected to each other. In this case, the "base of the first control unit MCG" The “plate BB” is a concept that includes at least both a first base substrate on which only the through-hole mounting region TH is formed and a second base substrate on which only the surface mounting region SM is formed. That is, such an aspect is also one of the aspects such as "the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is provided in a form in which both the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are separated from each other". It is included as an embodiment.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a component (surface mount component) mounted in the surface mount area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance, it is a discrete electronic component enclosed in a relatively small package. By allowing only parts to be used, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting illegal parts (reducing the space on the back side).

However, even if the discrete component (surface mount component) has excellent security performance, there is a small space on the back side of the discrete component (surface mount component) that is difficult to visually confirm when it is mounted in the surface mount area SM. Still left. Therefore, the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1 understands that "there is no space left on the back side of the discrete parts (surface mount parts) for mounting illegal parts". However, in a situation where it is difficult to visually confirm the anxiety such as "a very small fraudulent part may be created and it may be mounted fraudulently". There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will become complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

Therefore, it is more desirable that the base boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are provided in the following modes instead of the above-described modes.

[Modification example of each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a part of a region of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modified example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 189. Although the description of the modification of the base substrate of the payout control board 951 will be omitted, it is possible to deform the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 described below with the same contents.

As shown in FIG. 189, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

Further, also in the through-hole mounting board THB according to this modification, a plurality of types of electronic components (through-hole mounting components) are mounted in the same manner as in the insertion mounting board TH of the above embodiment. Similarly, among these electronic components (insertion mounting components), both the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance and the discrete component D2b having high security performance are included.

However, as is clear from FIG. 189, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insert mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. Only electronic components that are mounted in the form of being provided are provided. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification has a surface mount region and a surface mount component mounted on the region, any of them can be seen at first glance. It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided.

More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insertion mounting components, and the special mounting component D3 (in the drawing, the special mounting component). It has D3a and a special mounting component D3b). Although the special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mount component) mounted in a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, it is concealed with respect to the through-hole mounting board THB. It is inserted and mounted via a lead portion TL for special insertion mounting described later.

According to such a special mounting component D3, fraud suppression is performed even though the surface mounting area described later and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area are respectively provided inside the surface mounting area. Since it will have an appearance shape that looks as if it is a single through-hole mount component mounted on the high-performance through-hole mount board THB, it is expected that it will be excluded from the target components for fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. Will be able to be. In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion of the through-hole mounting board THB in which the special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted is surface-mounted on which the surface-mounting component is mounted. It will function as an area.

Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not collectively (adjacently) arranged in one place, but are placed in a plurality of places on the base board MB. In addition to being dispersed, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component D3a) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insert mounting area) in which the through-hole mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. It is supposed to be set up.

That is, in this case, the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mount components) mounted in the surface mount region are subdivided and inconspicuous, and in combination with the above-mentioned appearance shape, the fraud suppression performance is improved. The surface mount area exists when a malicious person looks at the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it is excellently mixed in the insert mounting area provided as a relatively large area. In particular, it becomes possible to make it even more difficult to notice, and it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts more preferably.

Further, as will be described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 129) as a surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 188 is enclosed inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting the backup power supply function. Nevertheless, even in this modification, the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and surface mounting area (Schottky diode element) of the plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) (Diode MD0)) and each are to be mounted separately. Moreover, the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) to be inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting area is located in the insertion-mounting area not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the shotkey diode element (diode MD0) (power supply board 931 or the like). It is implemented in.

In this way, it is difficult to recall that the electronic component built in the special mounting component D3a exerts a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), and the difficulty of circuit understanding is increased. As a result, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In addition, in FIG. 189, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted to expose the internal structure thereof. The figure (the part surrounded by the dotted line) is included.

As shown in the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification includes a special surface mount board SMB as a surface mount board on which a surface mount type electronic component (surface mount component) is mounted, and the above. A surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on a special surface mount board SMB, and a lead part for special insertion mounting as a lead part for insertion mounting inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the above insertion mounting board THB. It includes a TL and an outer package OP that molds each of these parts with a molding resin.

Here, the special surface mount board SMB electrically connects the surface mount lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the board and the special insert mount lead portion TL. It has a wiring pattern HP formed so as to be connected to each other, and is provided so that its mounting surface is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the through-hole mounting board THB.

The surface area of the special surface mount board SMB on the mounting surface is limited to a size sufficient for mounting the surface mount type discrete component D2a, and is required, for example, when the integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. It is designed to have a mounting surface with an area smaller than the area considered to be. That is, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, a margin space for further mounting other electronic components is left, whereas it is special. In the surface mount board SMB, in order to reduce the size, when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is enough space to mount other electronic components. Not left.

With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to perform some kind of fraud on the special surface mount board SMB, so that the hardware circuit can be further miniaturized while suppressing the mounting of fraudulent parts. It will be expected.

Further, the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) that is molded by a molding resin. Inside, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mount lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin), and the surface mount lead portion SL is provided. By being electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB, it can be connected to other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected so that processing can be performed in cooperation with each other.

Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with a flat external shape (package shape), and is soldered so that the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. It is surface-mounted. However, as described above, the special surface mount board SMB on which the surface mount type discrete component D2a is mounted has a relationship in which the mounting surface thereof is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 is not a flat surface thereof but a thin surface (thin surface) facing the insertion mounting substrate THB. It will be implemented in a form.

In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area, not a flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the through-hole mounting substrate THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 189, only a small area (two through-holes) is left in the insertion mounting board THB so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be arranged in the small area (for two through holes).

The size (horizontal length in the drawing) of the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself according to this modification is when the special mounting component D3a is mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB. The pitch between the through holes into which the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting is inserted (installation interval of specific insertion holes) is smaller than that.

Further, the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mount board SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP of the special surface mount board SMB is formed. By being soldered at the present location, it is fixed to the special surface mount board SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mount lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. .. On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered while being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and the insertion mounting board THB side. It is electrically connected to various electronic components via the wiring pattern of.

Further, although the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by the mold resin, the mold resin is different from the mold resin. Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

With such a configuration, it becomes extremely difficult to perform some kind of fraud on the surface mount board having poor fraud suppression performance.

In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the external shape created by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component itself surface-mounted inside. .. That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a itself can be mounted in a concealed state, it seems that a specific type of surface mount component built in the special mounting component D3a is not mounted. The difficulty of understanding the circuit will be increased, and fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

Moreover, in the outer package OP, only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided inside is the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded together with the special surface mount substrate SMB so as to be pulled out to the outside of the above, whereby the special mount component D3a is inserted and mounted as a lead portion (special insertion mount). It is mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL).

According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a is provided even though the surface mount board having poor fraud suppression performance and the electronic component (surface mount component) mounted on the board are provided inside. Since it will be possible to function as if it were a single insert mounting component mounted in an insert mounting area with excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from the targets of fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. Will be able to be. In addition, since it can be handled in the same manner as a single insertion-mounting type discrete component in terms of distribution and mounting, it can be said that it is also excellent in terms of such ease of handling.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding with the target special surface mount substrate SMB, the appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes is also given.

That is, as shown in FIG. 188, when the surface-mounted discrete component is left in an external shape smaller than the pitch between through holes (installation interval of insertion holes) in the insertion mounting region, the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may promote fraudulent activity.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes is regarded as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after having an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 189, there are no electronic components having an external shape having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes on the base board MB of the main control board 1310, and the electronic components are inserted and mounted. Since it is possible to make it appear as if only the type of electronic component (through-hole mounting component) is mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of an unauthorized component.

Furthermore, the external shape created by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of the electronic components surface-mounted inside, and all the through-hole mounting components (special) mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB. It has a unique appearance shape that is different from any of the electronic components except the mounting component D3). That is, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification provides excessive security performance such as protecting the mere discrete component D2a, which has only limited functions as compared with the arithmetic processing unit, with a double mold resin. After giving it, it is designed to have a unique and relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape that intentionally attracts the attention of malicious persons (trap).

According to such a configuration, the excessive security performance provided on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, so that the motivation to commit fraud is reduced. Can be expected.

Further, the outer package OP is given an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a. In this modification, the content (○ 3213) of the identification number is described in the inner package (○ 3213). It is designed to be different from the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB.

According to such a configuration, the content (SD) of the identification number assigned to the surface mount component of a specific type does not appear, so that the appearance shape created by the outer package OP and the surface mount inside are mounted. Coupled with the fact that the appearance shape of the surface mount component of a specific type is different (combined with the structure of the double mold), it becomes possible to make it appear that the surface mount component of a specific type is not mounted. In addition, it becomes possible to make it appear as if only the through-hole mounting type electronic components (through-hole mounting components) are mounted, and it becomes possible to improve the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal components.

Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length of the special surface mount substrate SMB in the thickness direction is made smaller than the length of the surface mount type discrete component D2a in the thickness direction. On top of this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the molding resin is directly attached to the back surface side thereof. It has become.

That is, by adopting such a configuration, not only a unique and asymmetrical appearance shape is formed, but also the length of the special mounting component D3a in the thickness direction is mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH. It is smaller than the length of the discrete component D2b in the thickness direction. This eliminates the need to secure a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the through-hole mounting board THB, in combination with the above-mentioned structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other. The special mounting component D3a can be mixed in while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification looks like a single insertion mounting type discrete component, but in reality, it is a special surface mount board SMB and a surface mount type discrete component. D2a and D2a are included in each of them. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is fixed to the special surface mounting board SMB inside and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. On the other hand, the through-hole mounting component has a structure in which the lead portion for insertion and mounting is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire inside the lead portion.

Further, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 189, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the surface mount special mounting component D3a, a special mounting component D3b for internally surface mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete component D2b of the insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting area TH and the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element. It forms a circuit. Recall that even with such a configuration related to a filter circuit, the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrically close role in exerting a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it becomes possible to expect suppression of fraud.

Regarding the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB. However, in this case, at least the tallest electronic component (insertion-mounting component) among the electronic components (through-hole mounting components) to be inserted and mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB is such that each electronic component is arranged side by side in a row. For example, it is desirable to keep the appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element omitted in the drawing) in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310.

Further, the special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may include a plurality of one type of electronic components. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are built in, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted horizontally and in a row on one special surface mount substrate SMB, and the electrons thereof are mounted. It is desirable that the components and the special surface mount substrate SMB are collectively molded with a molding resin and packaged.

However, if a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the appearance shape will naturally become large, and "because it is a type of electronic component that is inserted and mounted in this size and shape, one There is a concern that it will not be possible to expect a dazzling effect that utilizes prejudice, such as "I think it is a discrete component of the insertion mounting type." Therefore, in order to preferably obtain the dazzling effect utilizing such prejudice, the appearance shape of one surface mount type discrete component is made different by the above-mentioned double mold structure, and its thinness is obtained. It is desirable to mount the surface so that it faces the through-hole mounting board TH.

In addition to forming the outer package OP of the above-mentioned double mold with a non-transparent material such as mold resin, the outer package has an identification number different from the identification number assigned to one surface mount type discrete component itself. It can be said that it is also important to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit by attaching it to the OP.

The special mounting component D3 according to this modification has a structure having a "one surface mount type discrete component" smaller than the "one insertion mounting type discrete component" inside the special mounting component D3. The size when double-molded is about the same as that of "one insertion-mount type discrete component", which makes it possible to expect the above-mentioned excellent effects. .. Therefore, in a configuration in which a "single insertion mounting type discrete component" is provided and double-molded, the size becomes larger than that of the "one insertion mounting type discrete component". Since it is clear, it cannot be expected to exert the above-mentioned excellent action and effect.

Next, the technical idea that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment and modification is described below.

[Technical Thought 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the game.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
A through-hole mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate.
It has a surface mount area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
Of the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mount components mounted on the surface mount region is the surface mount component itself, which is molded by the mold resin. Is a gaming machine characterized in that it is molded together with the surface mount area to be mounted by another mold resin.

[Technical Thought 1-2]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and can execute a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a game machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the progress processing of the game.
In the base plate of the second control unit, an insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate and a lead portion provided in the electronic component are included in the base plate. Of the surface mount area mounted on the surface of the above, only the surface mount area is provided.
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the through-hole mounting region and the surface mounting region.
Of the plurality of electronic components, the first side surface mount component mounted on the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the first control unit and the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the second control unit. Of the first side surface mount component and the second surface mount component, although the second side surface mount component to be mounted is itself molded by a molding resin. The game machine is characterized in that the first side surface mount component is further molded together with the surface mount area by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the first side surface mount component itself.

In such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, the surface mount components mounted in the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance are molded by the molding resin, though they themselves are molded. Since the surface mounting area to be mounted is integrally molded with a mold resin different from the mold resin, some fraud can be applied to the surface mount area having poor fraud suppression performance. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technical Thought 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the game.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that lead parts for through-hole mounting provided in the through-hole mounting parts of the electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate in which the surface mount lead portion provided on the surface mount component of the electronic components is placed on the surface.
The surface mount plate has
At least a special surface mount plate having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount plate and be inserted into the through-hole mount plate is included.
On the special surface mount plate,
A wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mount lead portion of the surface mount component mounted on the special surface mount plate and the special insert mount lead portion is provided.
The surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount plate are
Of the surface mount lead portion and the special insert mount lead portion, only the special insert mount lead portion is molded integrally with the special surface mount plate so as to be pulled out to the outside of the mold resin. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted on the through-hole mounting plate as an electronic component having a lead portion for special through-hole mounting.

In such technical idea 2, the surface mount component mounted in the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance functions as if it is one insert mount component mounted in the insert mount area excellent in fraud suppression performance. Being able to do so can be expected to be excluded from the fraudulent purposes of malicious individuals.

[Technical Thought 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the game.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that lead parts for through-hole mounting provided in the through-hole mounting parts of the electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate in which the surface mount lead portion provided on the surface mount component of the electronic components is placed on the surface.
For the surface mount component,
It includes at least discrete surface mount components in which single-function elements are molded with mold resin.
The discrete surface mount component is
The discrete surface mount component itself has a relatively large appearance shape by being integrally molded with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin itself, and the base of the specific control unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it has an appearance shape different from that of all electronic components mounted on a board.

In such a technical idea 3, an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is given to a mere discrete surface mount component which has only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. , It is designed to have a unique and relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape that intentionally attracts the attention of malicious persons (trap). That is, in this case, since the excessive security performance provided in the specific control unit can be shown to a third party, it can be expected that the motivation to commit fraudulent acts will decrease.

[Technical Thought 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the game.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
A through-hole mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate.
It has a surface mount area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mount region is dispersedly provided at a plurality of locations so that each region is a relatively small region, whereas the insert mounting region is dispersed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the surface mount areas provided.

In such a technical idea 4, the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is not grouped in one place but dispersed to be subdivided into small pieces to make them inconspicuous, and then the fraud suppression performance is excellent and relatively large. It is arranged in such a way that it is mixed in the insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a malicious person to notice the existence of the surface mount area when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit, and while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts, It is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized.

[Technical Thought 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic circuits.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the game.
The plurality of electronic circuits
A backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of a single-function element. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
A through-hole mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate.
It has a surface mount area in which a lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
The insertion mounting area is
The electronic components mounted in the surface mount area are provided as relatively large areas surrounding the surface mount area so as to be adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the through-hole mount area.
The backup power supply circuit
Although it is provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off, the capacitor and the diode of the discrete circuit have the same. One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mount region surrounded by the through-hole mounting region, and the other electronic component is the one electron mounted on the surface mount region of the through-hole mounting region. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted at a position not adjacent to a component.

In such a technical idea 5, although it is one discrete circuit for the purpose of exerting a specific electric function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on the base plate in the insertion mounting area. Electronic components with a shape that allows them to be smoothed and electronic components that have a shape that enables mounting on the surface mount area will be mixed. Therefore, it is recalled that when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of the specific control unit, they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it becomes possible to expect suppression of fraud.

Moreover, after arranging the surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, into the insertion mounting area, which is provided as a relatively large area with excellent fraud suppression performance, a specific electrical function (backup power supply) is provided. The capacitors and diodes included in one discrete circuit for the purpose of exerting the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, and even if the existence is noticed, the electronic component mounted in the surface mount area cooperates with other electronic components. As a result, it becomes difficult to recall what kind of electrical function is mounted to exert, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it is preferable to suppress fraud. You can expect it.

[Technical Thought 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the game.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted by inserting lead parts for insertion and mounting provided in electronic components,
It has a surface mount plate on which surface mount leads provided on electronic components are placed on the surface.
The surface mount plate has
At least a special surface mount plate having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount plate and be inserted into the through-hole mount plate is included.
The special surface mount plate is
It has a wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting plate and the special insertion mounting lead portion, and also has a wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the lead portion for insertion mounting to the insertion mounting plate. The special insertion mounting lead portion is inserted into the insertion mounting plate and arranged so that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.
A game machine characterized by that.

In general, the components mounted on the surface mount plate often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the above technical idea 6, the special surface mount plate is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insert mounting plates are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, the electronic component is mounted as the through-hole mounting plate because the thin surface having only a relatively small area is opposed to the through-hole mounting plate instead of the flat surface having a relatively large area. The special surface mount plate can be arranged even in a situation where only a small possible area (surface area) is left.

[Technical Thought 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is equipped with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the game.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted by inserting lead parts for insertion and mounting provided in electronic components,
It has a surface mount plate in which a surface mount lead portion provided on an electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion holes provided in the insertion mount plate. And
The specific surface mount component
Despite the size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, it is integrally with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A gaming machine characterized in that by being molded, it has an external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion holes.

That is, when a specific surface mount component is left in an external shape smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the through-hole mounting plate, a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which in turn can encourage fraud.

In this regard, in the above technical idea 7, the specific surface mount component is integrally molded together with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance of an electronic component with a size that does not fit within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole is made to appear, a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It will be possible to make things less noticeable to third parties.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 145. FIG. 142 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 143 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 143, and FIG. 145 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 123. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out game balls as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 142 (a), the main control board. Commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951, and one prize ball is specified in command 10H, and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 142 (b), the payout control board 951 is used from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH gives a prize. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 142 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power-on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123 as shown in FIG. 143. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state. The probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a probability state and not a time-saving state (a low-probability non-time-saving state is set as a normal game state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be displayed. The number of stops displayed is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is lengthened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of the game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state). , By increasing the number of decisions as to whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces, and by lengthening the period of opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the normal electric winning opening 2011 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to. Even if such a time saving state ends and is controlled to a normal gaming state (non-time saving state) when the normal electric winning opening 2011 is in the open state, the normal electric winning opening 2011 is predetermined. When the specified number of game balls are not accepted, the open state can be maintained even after being controlled to the normal game state (non-time saving state). However, when a predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls are accepted or a preset opening time elapses) is satisfied in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the maintained opening is performed. The state will end and it will be closed.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled in the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state), when hitting right, the normal electric winning opening 2011 or the first Expected value of winning balls that are expected to be paid out based on the acceptance of game balls in the winning openings such as the non-electric starting winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the expected value. When compared with the consumption of the ball held to obtain the expected value of winning the prize ball, the consumption of the ball held is set to be larger. Therefore, when controlled in the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state), for example, the jackpot determination in the pending state (in the second time saving state, the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side) In the situation where the jackpot winning is included and the number of pending jackpot judgments (the number of reserveds on the second special symbol side in the second time saving state) has reached the upper limit, the game ball It can be said that it is desirable for the player not to make a new launch. In particular, when a big hit is won in the first time saving state, it may be possible to shift to the second time saving state and make a big hit judgment on the second special symbol side. Therefore, the big hit judgment (first special symbol) It can be said that it is desirable for the player to prevent a new launch of the game ball even if the number of holds of) has not reached the upper limit. Therefore, when a production that definitely indicates that a big hit has been won appears during the symbol change of the special symbol, the launch of the game ball is interrupted because there is a concern that the new launch of the game ball is not desirable for the player. It is beneficial for the player to do so.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 123, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123 as shown in FIG. 143. It is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 143, the categories related to big hits include big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open Nth display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command between the rounds starts during the closing of the large winning opening 1 (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 123). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot symbol display command. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command is used to instruct the start of opening), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the big winning opening 2005), and the command for displaying the closing of the big winning opening 1 is sent at the time of closing the big winning opening 1 (starting closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005. Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot unit 2100 is opened (when the jackpot unit 2100 is opened). ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 143, the power-on category is composed of commands named power-on state and power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. ), Information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, and low-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It is composed of information indicating that. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuations occur). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to identify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the normal solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 123. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Is also sent to.). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu synchronization production related]
The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123, and the division is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the vessel 1402, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It is composed of a time-saving state and a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state (a low-probability non-time-saving state is set as a normal gaming state).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service production-related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the normal drawing solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. 143. It consists of commands named Hit Opening, Solenoid Open Display, and Solenoid Ending. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts during the opening of the normal power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2107 of the normal figure). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is left and right when the normal power is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the solenoid 2107 of the normal figure). It is transmitted at (when expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 144, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. To these various commands, "6 * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). (When the count sensor 4005 detects) is instructed to start the winning abnormality notification, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 123. This is to instruct the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when the above occurs.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the state is set. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 is directed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The main body frame opening notification is instructed when the main body frame is opened, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, it instructs the end of the main body frame opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them becomes disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 144, the status display division is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error clearing command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. 144. While setting it as a status, set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 144, the test-related division is composed of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 126. It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 144, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is variable. The state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortened non-operating state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is to hold 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (holding number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on this, the first special symbol display 1403 indicates the start of the look-ahead effect that notifies the advance notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used at the time of starting port winning (when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, or the second When the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the start port sensor 4004), the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The fluctuation shortening operation end specification command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end specification command is It is sent at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" is exhausted, and the special symbol 1 storage command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (When a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start port is further set. It is transmitted when a game ball enters in 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). The special symbol 2 memory command is still displayed when the number of balls on hold for operation of special symbol 2 changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is an unused number of holds, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of holds increases, or from the number of holds, the second special symbol display 1405 displays a variable display of the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is reduced, the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed). When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol in the device 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball is inserted in the first start port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls increases due to the ball (when the number of reserved balls increases), and the number of reserved balls increases when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation increases (when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004). When you do). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first start port 2002, or the second start port. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the fact by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in the above uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 merely receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 145, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when the ball is out. Indicates a bit.) Is set to a value 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value 1 in stock of 50 or more, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to a value 1 in B5, a value 0 in B6, and a value 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball-shaped, payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. For a ball-shaped ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 has a defect. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game balls are repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. A value of 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 146, and FIG. 148 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 123, which is variable and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game state, which is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when a small hit game state is generated. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 and a random number for determining normal symbol hit are used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, and the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variablely displayed by the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 123. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 123. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 123 The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. 123. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the extracted ID code, performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit judgment value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed to perform the second operation. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 123 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for setting the initial value in the main control built-in WDT1310af that monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT1310af with built-in main control is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 132. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power failure clearing process, the power failure clear signal is first output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when latching a state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Set to the state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 126, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until you do). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When the power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). In this checksum, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S28, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the main control side power off processing described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing a value of 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit. To do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a game machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 123 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hard random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is determined in advance at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power recovery information set in the main control built-in RAM work area in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 143 is shown. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to send the detection signal input in connection with the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed ( Game control side normal operation control means), it is handled as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol hit, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the rewriting of game information.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes the normal diagram solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol indicator 1403, the second special symbol indicator 1405, and the first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 123. , The second special hold number indicator 1406, the ordinary symbol indicator 1402, the ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting this RAM access prohibition, it becomes impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent power recovery.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power cutoff process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island facility is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started by timing, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the power on processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power restoration and there is no manifestation of intention by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 to the VDD terminal which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process of power failure on the main control side composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, so far. As you can see, the processing when the power is cut off on the main control side can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period at the time of momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the process when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. If the power failure warning signal has been input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. By making it impossible to start the time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt processing on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one that is covered by hardware so that the power failure processing is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to surely prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the command, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the solenoid 2107 in the normal drawing and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 123. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the normal-figure solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 123. In other words, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is open, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 controls the main control in step S34. Main control in setting the work area of the built-in RAM Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven by restoring to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Will be started to shift from the closed state to the open state of the grand prize opening 2005.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005, is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 123, and a large winning opening 1 count display command is issued to convey the number of game balls entering the large winning opening 2005. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the 4th round (4th round) of the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened. A large winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition to the closed state (that is, the closing start of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). Then, when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state. A command for displaying the fifth round of opening the large winning opening 2005, which indicates the transition (that is, starting the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005), is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Become.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and is in a game state advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded). While the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be transmitted to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the normal figure solenoid 2107 to drive the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece of the above is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the driving of the normal figure solenoid 2107 is started and a pair. The movable piece of the above will shift from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and is generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 143. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the closed state to the open state. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the fact that the peripheral control board 1510 is to be used, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) that specifies that the four rounds are in the jackpot game state. Although it cannot be displayed in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, a screen (for example, a screen indicating that the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is open in the big hit game state). A screen that conveys the message "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") On the game board side production display device 1600. It is possible to instruct a player who is displayed in the display area and sits in front of the pachinko machine to insert a game ball into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, the first (Ii) In a state where the game ball can be accepted into the start port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen that tells that the drive of the normal drawing solenoid 2107 is started and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction (for example, "The movable pieces are expanded downward. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen) that conveys the message "Please play the game so that the game ball is put into the mouth" to the player in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600, and the front of the pachinko machine. It is possible to instruct the player seated in the game to insert the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 143 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 124 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. Information instructing which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, and low-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored in the recovery time. It is composed of information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), and the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs after 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Even though the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can move to the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to, and which work has the same copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection step of the manufacturing line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 146 and 147.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 148 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is the main control side, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for informing that has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

As described above, when the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is operated to the open state by winning a normal hit, it is better when it is controlled to the time saving state than the normal gaming state (non-time saving state). The time for maintaining the open state is extended, which makes it easier for the game ball to be accepted by the normal electric winning opening 2011 when the time is controlled to be shortened. Here, when a normal hit is won, the normal symbol fluctuation according to the corresponding selection is started, but unless the normal symbol fluctuation is stopped, the normal electric winning opening 2011 is in step S116 shown in FIG. 148. There is no transition to the processing step of operating the movable member 2011a. That is, in this case, the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 does not move to the open state and maintains the closed state. On the other hand, when the normal symbol variation is stopped at the hit symbol, the process shifts to the processing step of operating the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 in step S116 shown in FIG. 148, and the normal electric winning opening The movable member 2011a of 2011 will move to the open state.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 123 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 Detects the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 123 and the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123, detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 123 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 123. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and input information. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 144 and other categories is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that have entered the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 When the switch input process is started, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time, respectively, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program transmits the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings, due to the effects of chattering and noise, etc. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 The reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs the winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 147. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 142 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of planned game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 142 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. In addition, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the number of added game balls is added. When the number of balls reaches 15, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 145. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information that conveys that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 144 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). Navi command and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 144 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 123, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or taking out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol and storing it in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. A value of 32767 is set, and the value is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 143 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 143 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. To do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified in relation to the big hit shown in FIG. 143 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). Attacker solenoid 2108 to create a closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or to open and close the big winning opening 2005. When the output of the drive signal to is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, it is shown in FIG. When the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to light the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15 times, the figure is shown. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to light the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in No. 10, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the occurrence of probability fluctuation occurs. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so as to light the presence / absence in a predetermined color, and the presence / absence is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery), it is determined whether or not to operate the movable member 2011a (a pair of movable pieces) of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 to the open state. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the normal electric winning opening 2011, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 143 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the normal electric winning opening 2011 is set to open and close the movable member 2011a (a pair of movable pieces). When the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, but the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the above description is performed. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 143 are created, and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. At the same time, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. To the normal electric winning opening 2011, the drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108, which opens and closes the big winning opening 2005, and the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened and closed. In addition to outputting the drive signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as output signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951. In addition, if the power is cut off between the time when the normal symbol is won and the normal symbol is stopped, or the RAM is cleared between the time when the normal symbol is won and the normal symbol is stopped. In such a case, there may be a situation in which the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is not opened because the ordinary symbol fluctuation is not stopped even though the ordinary hit is won.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various categories in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 143, created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. A big winning opening based on a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 123) when a game ball entered in a command or a variety of commands classified as a big hit related command (for example, a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected). Large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified as related to the normal electric service production, FIG. 144. Various commands classified into the notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into the status display (frame state 1 command, error release navigation) Commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and a sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 133 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the power is restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 147. Because the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Status, status, which configures the power-on state command, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, and the game information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 144. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (1st main body frame closing command) A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 144. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 144.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 123 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command in FIG. It is possible to output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reserved setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 147. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power recovery), the power on state command and the power on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. The effect can be displayed in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in this state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 146 shows. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the inspection device of the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for identifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[15. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 165. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 149, and FIG. 151 shows the payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of the rotation detection sensor history creation processing, and FIG. 154 is a sprocket. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball scooping determination process, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. 157 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process, and FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball operation determination setting process. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process, FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball-shaped motion setting process, and FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 163. Is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process, FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release operation determination process, and FIG. 165 is a signal process (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, from the CR unit. It is a timing chart which shows the input signal confirmation processing (a) of.

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, and award. Prize ball stock number addition process for balls, prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, stock monitoring process, payout ball motion judgment setting process, payout setting process, ball ball motion setting process, retry motion monitoring process, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball shaving judgment processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball motion determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is performed as processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball addition judgment processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset judgment processing, error release operation judgment processing, prize ball stock number for prize balls The order of priority is set in the order of addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for lending, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball movement determination setting processing.

[15-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 turns on the power of the payout control unit under the control of the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIGS. 149 to 151. Perform time processing. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode for the payout control MPU952a (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU952a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control program performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU952a are set.

Following step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and it is determined that the operation switch does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. While it is determined that the operation switch 954 is not operated, it is determined that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the payout control MPU952a (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. (Delivery control side power-on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, various information). The prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information whose status is set), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. Will be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU952a.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program sets to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack in order.

Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates the checksum (step S524). In this checksum, the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (power down) described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU952a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). Then, this power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step. When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed, the payout control program covers the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear process when the operation signal of the operation switch 954 is detected (the payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control program sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is used as the main control board 1310. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

When the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input. To judge.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information and payout motor 834 that convey that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 142) have been normally received. Various information such as drive information for controlling the drive to, prize ball number information for the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b is stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a based on the output information, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the payout motor. A drive signal is output to the 834, or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 is output to the external terminal plate 784 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 834 is actually 10). A prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 784 each time each game ball is paid out. Specifically, a prize ball number information signal output determination counter for outputting prize ball number information is provided. The prize ball number information signal output determination counter is used to determine the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 described later. It counts based on the detection signal of the payout control, and is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. The process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 is the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 is added to the value of the signal output determination counter based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 described later. In step S548, the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and the value of the read prize ball number information signal output determination counter exceeds the value 10. At this time, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 784, and the excess number of balls is used as the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter to store the prize ball information in the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The memory is updated in the area ing. ), The display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 954, the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection. The signal and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. To do.

Following step S550, the payout control program performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a sphere squeeze state is generated by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is determined. Time, skip judgment time set when the fixed position judgment of the payout rotating body is not performed, ball removal judgment time set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 , The full tank determination time and the ball out detection sensor set as the determination conditions when determining whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 by the detection signal from 827 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the ball-out determination time, etc. set as the determination condition is determined. In addition to managing the time, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 842 are inconsistent due to inconsistency. When determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the ball is paid out repeatedly, the time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Do. For example, when the ball squeeze judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the sphere squeeze judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is obtained. When the value becomes 0, the ball is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. The withdrawal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are accurately measured. It should be noted that these various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6.
In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the signal is set.

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 830 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU952a momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Etc. are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. , The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game ball can be continuously paid out. It has become like.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU952a. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball is in the movement judgment setting process. , As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal telling that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit 6. It is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU952a. Outputs to the CR unit 6. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is paid out to the CR unit 6. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball by the device 830 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When the power is turned on and the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869, the lending ball is to be paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logical state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869, the payout ball is paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is not possible, the logical state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 951. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 270 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-mentioned payout device 830 by the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827 is a predetermined number or more. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to detect the full tank in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. When the detection signal from the sensor 279 is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is ON, the above-mentioned state information is provided to indicate that the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area. ..

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls. When the detection signal from the detection sensor is ON, the detection signal from the ball burnout detection sensor is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball burnout check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is OFF. When the signal changes from to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts timing the ball-out determination time (119 ms) described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 827 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 827 is ON, the ball-out information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is displayed. While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 827 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball out. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control program performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 142) are received.
When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control program performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball pulling, and ball scooping are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. To do.

Following step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b of the payout control board 951 is created, and the output information storage area described above is used as the LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, the corresponding display data ( In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 145 based on the various information. Create a command, main unit frame closing command, frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command), and frame state 2 command) to create the main control board 1310. Send to. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created based on the ball-out information when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Further, in this command transmission process, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error related to the payout operation of the game ball, the payout control program provides information on the part where the error occurs related to the payout operation (hereinafter, A frame state 1 command (first error release command) including "error occurrence position information") is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the above-mentioned error occurs when the payout control program detects that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected. Output the release navigation command (first error release command) (command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) when a main body frame opening detection signal is input from the main body frame opening switch 619 (main body frame command sending means, first 1 main body frame command sending means). B. Ayumu, this payout control program transmits a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) when a main body frame closing detection signal is input from the main body frame opening switch 619 (main body frame command sending means). , First body frame command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) when a door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618 (door frame command sending means, first 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, first 1 door frame command sending means). Further, in the command transmission process (step S566) described above, this payout control program reads error information including error contents from the state information storage area described above, and has unit number information for distinguishing itself from other pachinko machines. An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Upon receiving this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned unit number information and error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk provides the pachinko machine with the unit number based on the unit number information. In, it is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, the payout control program sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input in step S540. If the determination is made and there is no input of this power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and the port output process is performed in step S548. , Step S550 performs port input processing, step S552 performs timer update processing, step S554 performs CR communication processing, step S556 performs full tank and ball out check processing, and step S558 performs command reception processing. Command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, and a value is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568. C is set, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU952a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU952a preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU952a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control program sets the watch dock timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control program sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, so that the watch dock timer is not set to clear. Therefore, the payout control MPU952a is reset, and then the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on processing again under the control of the payout control MPU952a. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU952a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[15-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on time process shown in FIGS. 149 to 151.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 sets the payout control program to disable the timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 152 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. To switch (save) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control program sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation process]
Next, the rotation detection sensor history creation process will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation process, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 detects rotation from the payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIG. 153. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S610). This rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation detection sensor detection history information LSB-HIST. In step S610, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program has a detection slit that grasps the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocked state to the non-blocked state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S614). In this shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

Following step S614, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST to a value 1 (step S616), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). .. In the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information in step S614, and the rotation detection sensor detection history information LSB-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0. Shifts bit by bit.

Following step S618, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST to a value 0 (step S620), and ends this routine.

In this way, each time the rotation detection sensor history creation process is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit rotates. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or depending on the state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state or the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 from the non-blocked state to the blocked state. Since the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 can be reliably started in a state where the ball is not squeezed.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a, and as shown in FIG. 154, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP- It is determined whether or not the FLG has a value of 0 (step S630). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), the value is 1, and the payout rotation The value is set to 0 when the fixed position of the body is determined (when not skipped).

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program determines the rotation detection sensor history information of the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not the value matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0 and a lower 4 bits. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit described above is the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 in succession in four timer interrupt cycles. Means that it is in a state of transition from a blocked state to a non-blocked state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 124 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since there is play (backlash) in these 1st gear, 2nd gear, and 3rd gear, the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the payout rotating body due to this backlash Since the rotation is designed to correspond to the rotation of about two steps of the payout motor 834, in the present embodiment, when determining the fixed position of the payout rotating body, the rotation detection sensor 840 is used. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation detection sensor history creation process shown in the history of the detection signal and FIG. 153, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, It is performed based on the detection signal from the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 834 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotation position of the payout motor 834. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. A value of 1 is set in the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). As a result, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control MPU952a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to a fixed position of the payout rotating body.

Following step S636, the payout control program effectively sets the skip determination time (step S638) and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (delivery rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the payout motor 834.

The payout control program manages the rotation position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 834 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. Specifically, (1) a transient state in which the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit detects rotation. A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 is transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position fixed state”), and (3) a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from a non-blocked state to a blocked state. It is managed in three states: the state in which it is set (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to the rotation of one step of the payout motor 834, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the rotation of four steps of the payout motor 834, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). This corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 834 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection panel, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time is the time for 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 834. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes effective in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. The payout control MPU952a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result reaches the value 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the initial value 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 1 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. .. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU952a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830, and guided to the payout device 830. When the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the payout device 830 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The payout device 830 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-mentioned fixed position determination skip state (3), that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitional state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. As a result, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is improved. As described above, the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Ball shaving judgment processing]
Next, the ball bending determination process will be described. This ball squeeze determination process determines whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted.

When the ball squeeze determination process is started, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 detects rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S640).

Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. This routine is terminated as it is, assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating and the ball is not in a squeezing state. To do.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the ball is flagged. The value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-squatting state is generated by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 834 is performing ball-sucking operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

Following step S644, the payout control program effectively sets the ball squeeze determination time (step S646) and ends this routine. When the ball squeeze determination time becomes effective, the sphere squeeze determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. ..

[15-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processes will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processes include a prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls and a prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, and the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is performed from the main control board 1310. It is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the prize ball command described later, and the process of adding the number of prize balls for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the number of prize ball stocks added in this prize ball stock number addition process is adjusted. After the game balls are paid out by the payout device 830, the number of prize ball stocks for lending is added.

[15-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program issues a prize ball command under the control of the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIG. 156. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as the received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program sends this prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read out from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 830, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in the present embodiment, it has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). There is. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from a value of 0 to a value of 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from this prize ball information storage area.

The payout control program adds the number of prize balls PBV read in step S652 to the number of prize ball stocks PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental]
Next, the process of adding the number of prize balls stock for lending will be described. When the process of adding the number of prize balls stock for lending is started, the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 requests the payout control program to lend the ball under the control of the payout control MPU952a as shown in FIG. 157. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball lending request signal.

When there is no ball lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when there is a ball lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program uses the above-mentioned prize ball information of the payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the number of rented balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is terminated. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball lending request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize ball is prioritized (the prize ball and the ball lending are managed separately), the ball lending request signal is held even when there is a ball lending request signal. , The loan ball will be paid out when the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the loan ball is paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS reaches a value of 0.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues the game during the game in a state where the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is a process to do.

When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a, and as shown in FIG. 158, the prize ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to a value of 1 (step S674) and ends this routine. With this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of prize balls stock described above) becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that the value has been reached, and is set to a value 1 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is reached, and a value 0 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is not reached.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to a value 0 (step S676) and ends this routine.

When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and looks at the effects unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 126, the player carelessly During one round, the game ball paid out as a prize ball may not be pulled out from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354. If the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls start to accumulate in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases to be equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH, and the door frame 3 is provided as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on various decorative boards flash. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is careful about the game. As a result, the clerk in the hall can inform the player that the game ball will be pulled out from the lower plate 322, and the player can fill the lower plate 322 (the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value 50, which corresponds to about one-fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). This makes it possible to inform the clerk of the hall to call attention to the player's game at the earliest possible stage.

[15-8. Payout ball movement judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball motion determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball movement determination setting process, the payout motor 834 pays out the game ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, performs the ball squeeze operation, or does not perform such payout or discharge. Or, it is a process to set to either.

When the payout ball operation determination setting process is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program has a built-in payout control as shown in FIG. 159 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Following step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retry). The value is set to 0 when the operation is normal).

When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S682 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S682, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally operating, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball-filled flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. (Step S686). The ball squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a sphere is squeezed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the sphere is squeezed by the payout motor 834. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and the value is set to 0 when the ball is not performing the motion.

When the ball-sucking flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-sucking operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the prize ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the region (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is an unpaid number of balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 834.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid number of balls, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. (Step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and ball out check process in step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full.

When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full in the game ball stored in step S692, the payout control program performs the payout setting process described later (step S694), and ends this routine. In this payout setting process, a payout operation is performed in which the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 834 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. 156. Will increase.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, the game ball is not paid out.

On the other hand, when the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1 in step S686, that is, the ball-grinding operation is performed, the payout control program performs the ball-grinding operation setting process described later (step S700), and this routine To finish. In this ball-grinding motion setting process, a ball-grinding motion is performed to eliminate the ball-grinding state by the payout rotating body of the payout device 830.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S702). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704) and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU952a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be lent (CR unit 6). When the logic of BRDY from is LOW, that is, when it is held down), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being down is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information. And store it in the CR communication information storage area.
As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 151. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CRed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 151. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. .. In addition, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some point (holding the XS signal up) is to maintain its logical HI.

[15-8-1. Payout setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 834 is driven to set the game ball to be paid out.

When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program outputs the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 160 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV has a value of 0 (step S712). This determination is determined based on the drive command number DRV whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 remains.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 is zero, the payout control program stops (stops) the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads out the actual ball count PB (step S718). This actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. This count will be described in detail later, but from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. It is performed based on the detection signal of. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the value 0 is set in the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are values 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the drive command number DRV as it is.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not a value 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts a value of 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S728, the payout control program adds a value of 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and ends this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is in the case of decrementing the drive command number DRV in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the determination of step S728, that is, If it is not incremented to the actual ball count PB, one game ball cannot be paid out because the game ball is not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Judge. Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-mentioned step S720 to the drive command number DRV in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation of paying out the one ball that should be paid out can be performed again. .. By performing this retry operation, the possibility that the game ball is not paid out to the player can be extremely reduced, and the disadvantage of the player due to the unpaid game ball can be prevented.

[15-8-2. Ball motion setting process]
Next, the ball bending motion setting process will be described. In this ball squeezing operation setting process, it is a process of setting to eliminate the ball squeezing state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 is transmitted.

When the ball squeeze operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program elapses the ball squeeze determination time as shown in FIG. 161 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step S750). This determination is performed based on the ball squeeze determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the ball bending determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball squeezing determination time has elapsed.

When the ball squeeze determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM (step S752). ..

Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program determines. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set so that the ball is squeezed (step S756), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, the drive information for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S758). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the payout control program sets the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG to a value of 0 as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-squatting state is generated by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 834 is performing ball-sucking operation. When no operation is performed (end of ball-sliding operation), the values are set to 0, respectively.

On the other hand, when the ball squeeze determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S762). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be rented at present, the payout control MPU952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When it is down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the down state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 151. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CRed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 151. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. .. As described above, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of is HI (the XS signal is held up), that logic HI is maintained.

Following step S764, the payout control program sets the value 0 in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program detects the rotation of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIG. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). This mismatch counter INCC includes the number of game balls that are received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842. It is a counter for calculating the difference between, and normally, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842 match. Therefore, the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 160, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the actual payout detection The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number of balls detected by the sensor 842 and the inconsistent payout of the game balls due to the inconsistency are repeatedly performed. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match. Occasionally, the payout control program determines if there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts a value of 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). ).

Following step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is less than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step). S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about 1 in millions, and in the present embodiment, the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. The value 5 is set as.

As described above, in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is stored at the time of power recovery. , Information used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored as the payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the payout device 830, which had been performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. There is. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device. It can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the 830 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in the normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state. It can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state by the determination in step S780 even at the time of power recovery.

When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCH is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control program determines the "retry error". In order to notify that, the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set with retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 951. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of (step S782). On the other hand, in the case of notifying that "the prize ball is in stock", the payout control program sets the prize ball stock information for displaying the number "9" on the error LED display 860b and has the above-mentioned built-in payout control. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) in the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the inconsistent counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, that is, when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It is initialized when this internal factor occurs. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 as a RAM clear signal. Under the control of the main control MPU1310a, the above-mentioned main control program erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and issues a RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. 123. Output to 1510. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 88.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retrying operation is). It is set to 0 when it is operating normally).

Note that the payout control program shows retry error information (or information in prize ball stock) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. In the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the LED display data of step S564 in the same process is created. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process. Based on this, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b, and the number "5" is displayed on the error LED display 860b. In the main control board 1310 that has received the state command, the main control program transmits the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 148 to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 issues a door frame side lighting / blinking command for outputting a lighting signal, which causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). It is output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in the above, and a plurality of LEDs are made to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs displayed the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 951 by opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It can be confirmed that the "retry error" has occurred by visually observing that "5" is displayed. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk or the like confirms a defect of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, and poor contact of various connectors. The work can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display contents of the error LED display 860b are not notified.

Further, by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 842, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Even if a fraudulent act of forcibly generating the retrying motion and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retrying motion is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC described above is equal to or higher than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. Then, since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk in the hall or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 842 can be suppressed to an extremely small value.

Further, as described above, the inconsistent counter INCC is set when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or higher than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It has come to be initialized when an internal factor such as the fact that it has become is generated. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when, for example, an external factor such as operating the operation switch 954 to clear the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU952a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. Absent.

[15-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the inconsistency counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between and.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a, and as shown in FIG. 163, the inconsistency counter reset determination time It is determined whether or not the elapse has passed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the inconsistency counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to an initial value of 7000s (about 2 hours).

Following step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) in the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM (step S794), and this routine To finish. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the payout detection sensor 842 and the number of game balls that are received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls, and is usually the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842, and the number of balls. Is the same, so the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 160 under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the ball of the game ball received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the inconsistent payout of the game balls due to the discrepancy between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 842 is repeated. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about 1 in several million.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a game board 5 and a frame body such as a main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board 5 is replaced (replacement of a new machine). Since the specifications can be changed, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout device 830 and the power supply board 931 that generates the drive power supply for the payout device 830 and the control power supply for the payout control board 951 are framed as common functions. It is equipped on the body side. In the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, it is abnormal whether or not the payout control program repeats the retry operation by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU952a. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 151, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the power-off is stored when the power is turned off, while the figure is shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 (setting at the time of power recovery of the RAM work area) in the process at power-on of the payout control unit shown in 150, the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power-on.

Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 5 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is replaced with a game board 5'of another game specification different from the game board 5, the payout control board is turned on. The payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 in the 951 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5'is mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5 before replacement is mounted is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 5', and there is a probability of 1 in millions that the number of inconsistent game balls is generated, and the inconsistency counter INCC is set. When the number increases and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the above-mentioned inconsistency value INCTH, the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5'and the payout control MPU952a determines that the retry operation is abnormal in a short period of time. There is a risk. That is, in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5', the payout detection sensor 842 is defective, the various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951 are disconnected, and various connectors are contacted. Even though no defect has occurred, it may be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation.

In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5'and judged as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replaced game board 5'is new, but the impression is that it is easy to break down. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out due to the retry operation is 1 in millions when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the hall's business hours. Since it is the same as the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out, there is a probability of one millionth from the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Only the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, in one week, the value 1 is incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 1, and in two weeks, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 2. In the week, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 3, and in the 4th week, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 4. The value 1 is further incremented by the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes a value of 5, which matches the above-mentioned inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, since the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a, and in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the judgment, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842, and there is a malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, and poor contact of various connectors. In order to notify that a “retry error” has occurred in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 162, the segment display mounted on the payout control board 951 is displayed. Retry error information for displaying the number "5" is set on the error LED display 860b, which is a device, and is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU952a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process, that is, every 7000s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of 1 in millions described above is incremented. It has been disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951 and poor contact of various connectors. It is possible to prevent the retry error information indicating the presence from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

It should be noted that by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 842, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. In the case where the payout detection sensor 842 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a short time even if a fraudulent act of forcibly generating the retrying motion and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retrying motion is performed, As described above, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that the clerk in the hall or the like is in the state of the pachinko machine 1. I will rush to confirm. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the payout detection sensor 842 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is performed every 7000 s (about 2 hours). However, during this period, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player is, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC up to the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 842 is used. Even if the player intentionally repeats the non-operation state for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who cheats can be extremely reduced.

[15-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is operated.

When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 cancels the error by the payout control program under the control of the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the operation is performed (step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 151. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, it is determined that the payout control program does not read the input information from the input information storage area and instruct to cancel the error when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. While it is determined that the operation switch 954 is not operated, it is determined that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the error is cleared and the operation switch 954 is operated. Judged as

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs an error flag status confirmation process. (Step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the payout device 830 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (the retry operation is operating normally). Since it is set, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 0 or a value 1 under the control of the payout control MPU952a.

Following step S802, the payout control program performs the state information setting process (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Set (store) in the status information storage area of the dispensed control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 151, and the read state is read. A state command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retrying operation is abnormally operating, an error has occurred in the retrying operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151 A retry error status command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by the main control program in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 148. On the control board 1510, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Check the harness of the payout control board" is made a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment). (2 times.) Repeatedly flowing from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 88, the clerk in the hall and the like are notified. The clerk in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of the retry operation reported the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, and the contact of various connectors. Defects and the like can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

Following step S804, the payout control program performs the release setting process (step S806). In this release setting process, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, it corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the content displayed by the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 951, is forcibly stopped or the ball can be rented. In order to convey the above-mentioned PRDY signal logic to HI, that is, the state in which it has been started up, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. It is output to the CR unit 6 via. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed the error. The retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is "normal" in order to forcibly stop the number "5" that notifies that the "retry error" is present. Forcibly overwrite the information in which the figure "-" that notifies the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the game ball is played from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the equal rental device connection terminal plate 869.

Following step S806, the payout control program performs an error flag initialization process (step S808), and ends this routine. In this error flag initialization process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, a value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 151. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. ..

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the process of step S786 of the same process, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and when the operation switch 954 is operated, this is the trigger, that is, this external factor is caused. When it occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 0 and initialized. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM in order to clear the RAM, that is, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, it is initialized when this external factor occurs.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control side main processing is executed from the time when the power of the operation switch 954 (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used for canceling the error generated in the payout operation, is turned on. Instead, the operation unit for exerting the RAM clear function for starting the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until It is functioning as. Further, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error generated in the payout operation of the game ball after the lapse of the predetermined time. Here, even if the hall clerk is not accustomed to operating the pachinko machine, as long as he / she remembers the position of the operation switch 954 on the back of the game machine, it depends on the timing of operating the operation switch 954. If a predetermined time has passed from the time when the power is turned on, the function of canceling the error generated in the payout operation of the game ball is exerted, while the predetermined time is determined from the time when the power is turned on according to the timing when the operation switch 954 is operated. Within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exerted. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a game machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation when dealing with the error and can appropriately deal with the switch operation without hesitation, so that the game is interrupted. The game can be restarted before the player is discouraged from playing.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 151 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 125. First, the signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is performed twice) is used as the number of balls to be rented. A case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are those that read the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and store it in the read input information, and perform CR communication processing. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms, which is the interrupt timer cycle.

[15-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by lending a ball]
The payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read out PRDY signal output setting information pays out the rental ball. When it is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. The logic of the PRDY signal is output as HI, that is, started up and held, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952, and as PRDY, the game ball rental device connection terminal. Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed by the player, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and this ball lending operation signal is used as the TDS shown in FIG. 125. It is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 into which the TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen as the number of balls to be rented to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, as shown in FIG. 165 (a). BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H1). .. This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

In the payout control MPU952a to which the BRDY signal is input, the payout control program sets the loan request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms) from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 165 (b). By the time the set number has elapsed, the number of balls rented from the CR unit 6 via the game ball renting device connection terminal plate 869 (25 balls in the present embodiment) in one payout operation. , Equivalent to 100 yen as the amount of money.) It is monitored whether or not the BRQ, which is a signal for requesting the start of one payout operation for paying out, is started.

Of the 200 yen worth of game balls, the CR unit 6 first pays out 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is output. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

As shown in FIG. 165 (c), in the payout control MPU952a, when the BRQ signal rises before the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in the present embodiment). (It is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to convey that one payout operation has started by the time elapses, the logic of the EXS signal is set as HI, that is, the payout control MPU952a is held in the activated state. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the above, and is output to the CR unit 6 as an EXS via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 165 (b), the CR unit 6 to which the XS is input is set to the lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, 20 ms to 58 ms) from the timing H3.
) Elapses, the BRQ that has been started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the signal is lowered and held. (Timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 165 (c), the payout control MPU952a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Go and pay out a predetermined number of balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen, to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of balls to be rented. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the XS signal that is started up and held from the timing H3 is held as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls out of the 200 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls. Therefore, FIG. 165 (b) ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate by the time when the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H5. It is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU952a pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls using the above-mentioned method, as shown in FIG. 165 (c). The EXS signal that has been started up and held is held as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

The CR unit 6 stands up from the timing H1 as shown in FIG. 165 (a) by the time when the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. 151. The time is measured in the timer update process of step S552 in the process when the power is turned on (main process of the payout control unit).

The payout control MPU952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is squeezed, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. occur (BRDY from the CR unit 6). When the logic is LOW, that is, when it is held down, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), the PRDY signal which is started and held from the timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, the state where the logic is lowered. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and dispensed. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU952a, and outputs as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI (maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal). It is to maintain its logical HI when the EXS signal is up and held).

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, and the payout control MPU952a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money and 100 as the amount of money. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a yen twice, the game balls having a loan number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322. A clerk in the hall or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of rented balls such as the upper plate 321 When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money once, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of balls to be rented. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money is calculated. When the number of balls to be rented is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU952a will perform the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
In the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951, the CR unit 6 passes the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Therefore, even if the signal is output to the payout control board 951 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects the BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even when the signal is output to the payout control board 951 via the terminal plate 869 and the signal is not shut down or the above-mentioned next request confirmation timing HE has passed. The CR unit 6 is BRDY even when the signal is output to the payout control board 951 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit rental completion monitoring time HF has elapsed. Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and when the signal is not shut down, the BRQ and the BRQ and the XS described above are used. Check whether the BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 165 (e) and 165 (f), the payout control MPU952a determines that the BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and from this timing J0 to a predetermined period JA (in the present embodiment). , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the output is held from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. Then, as a PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set as LOW, that is, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is held in the down state. It is output from the output terminal of the above, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the logic of the PRDY signal, which is stopped and held from the timing J1 after the lapse of the predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1, as HI. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing J2 after the lapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J2, and its logic is set to LOW. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is held down from the timing J3 as HI after the elapse of the predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal that is started and held from the timing J4 as LOW after the elapse of the predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4. That is, it is held in the down state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is held down from the timing J5 as HI after the elapse of the predetermined period JF (set to 10000 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on time process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151.

[16. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 174. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 168 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and FIG. 171 is a flowchart of LOCKN signal history creation processing. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example, FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing, FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of connection recovery processing, and FIG. 174 is an interrupt terminal of a door frame side effect transmitter IC. On the other hand, it is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal.

As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 is composed of a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and LOCKN signal. The history creation process, connection failure determination process, and connection recovery process will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and the connection failure determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit power is turned on, which will be described later. It is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process, and the connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 166. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 166. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to interrupt enable, and is output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 127 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 127 (SRAM). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set for Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 126 and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 126, and FIG. 127 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information in a range of 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 126. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 126. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad one byte at a time. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the operation button 410 is operated based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 128 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. From the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 to various effects by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by the combined music and sound effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is based on the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. Normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, large winning opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 143 related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified into the jackpot, and the power-on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 144, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to testing, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 144, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 144. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 which may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The saved calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. At the same time, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates a sprite data on the game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 127 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 into the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb up to the contents stored in the terminal address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is high-speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) up to the contents stored in the terminal address of the backup first area 1511db in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc. Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, which is shown in FIG. 126, is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 167 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 166 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 166. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 166 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 166. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 166. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 166 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 168. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 166. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 126 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the constituent time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. The peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 127 is set in the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the required factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. It is possible to acquire the operation presence / absence of the operation button 410 from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 127 are created. The control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 kb up to the contents stored in the end address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc, and Bank 0 (1 ms) is specified. ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms), the start address of Bank3 (1ms) in the second area 1511cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 166, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 169 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery The 1-byte information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status that is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main cycle serial data When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main frequency serial data, the mode is still the second byte of the main frequency serial data, and the third byte of the main frequency serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and 3 of the main peripheral serial data. When the sum value which is the byte th is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a shaving environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is affected by noise and changed to a main peripheral serial data different from the normal one between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 127. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are the received command storage areas. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the above mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 129, is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning). It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is started. The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, a predetermined byte (for example,) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). , 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the receiving command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 1511 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 126 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a gives a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 166 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. Therefore, the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 168 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127, as shown in FIG. 171. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511ca (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal, which has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts bit by bit from to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 166 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127, as shown in FIG. 172. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 126, and in the present embodiment, it is “000011111B (“B” represents a bit) ”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined, and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective each time this routine is executed. It is (counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 166 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 172, and is performed by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. And, that is, when a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 is in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 166, as shown in FIG. 173. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of the screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a customer waiting state is performed and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the startup screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period when the pachinko machine is waiting for customers or during the period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period when the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is in the waiting state for customers to perform the demonstration (simply in the waiting state for customers). This routine is terminated as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 172 is executed. The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is counted up. (Count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has reached the transmitter and the transmitter. A flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side effect. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing to. For example, the message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state is performed. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The peripheral control MPU1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is a game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform the flow process. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 174.

First, a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the stationary processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is the main control side of the main control side shown in FIG. 147 by the main control MPU 1310a. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. 148, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the starting port 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120 can be recognized by the player. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for transmitting the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is shown as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit for the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. Because the pointer is updated to indicate the number of screen data to be output to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, it follows the screen generation schedule data. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is running, and while the screen generation schedule data is running, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 173 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 166 until the stop is displayed. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection with the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "upper plate" is displayed. Since the message "There was a problem with the side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, tell that the drawing data received from the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady processing, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and the pointer Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 166 is turned on. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery processing shown in FIG. 173, which is executed as one processing of the warning processing in step S1024 in the steady processing, the process proceeds to the processing of step S1542 in the same processing, and the communication check counter CC- When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is set to the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection between the ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the data is data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is set to the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When it has reached (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. The message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed and notified.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information most of interest to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect in the middle and restoring the state to be able to draw correctly. By stopping and displaying the decoration pattern on the right side, the drawing of the information most of interest to the player is completed.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state. This is significantly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period of the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period of the operation, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the transmitter IC1512d for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is considered to be defective, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a defect. (For example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") To that effect by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to the game board side production display device. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that received the LOCKN signal output request data is now output as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 173 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can very easily check whether or not there is a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d cannot be normally received, the receiver ICSDIC0 receives a communication problem between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal for transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which informs that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. A message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is generated, which is an image indicating that the image is being displayed, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600. It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by early detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a problem in the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move toward solving the communication problem.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is being repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined. Data pattern (SYNC pattern) can be stopped to be transmitted to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), it can be directed to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 123 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 124. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which are start areas in which game balls launched by the ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 123, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 124 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 of FIG. 124. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 146 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 131 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor, and the operation is performed within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S512 in the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 149 is performed. Then, the RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the payout control MPU952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as the RAM clear signal for erasing the information about the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and the power-on. From time to time, the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 146 is performed (or the period during which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. When the operation is performed after the lapse of time, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor as an error release signal for canceling the error generated in the payout device 830, and the payout control microprocessor It also has an error canceling function that outputs to a certain payout control MPU952a.

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the process when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. 146 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 131 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination process of step S512 in the process of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 149 is performed from the time of power-on. When operated within the specified period, the RAM clear that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the payout control microprocessor MPU952a as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 146 is performed from the power-on (or the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 149 from the power-on). When the operation is performed after the elapse of the period), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for canceling the error generated in the payout device 830. Since it also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clearing function, can be performed by operating one operation switch 954. It can be provided in 1. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[17. Sensor signal input section of panel relay board]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , This is a circuit in which a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

In a game machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into the game area to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired to obtain an unfair profit. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, etc., a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

[17-1. Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 175 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit installed in a game machine. The game machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive sensor, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, + 5V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. It is designed not to (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

When the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. Further, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

In addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to a collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON2. , + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the pull-up resistor NR1 and also to one end of the resistor NR2, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which + 12V is applied. Further, the detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied while being connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and a transistor ITR1 in which a base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Applies to.

Further, in the previous stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of a circuit composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[17-2. Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the built-in transistor STR is turned off when the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table format in FIG. 179. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. ..

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. There are two types of connector members, pin contact type and bellows contact, depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member. In the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, pin contact Gap is easier to open than the type. When a gap is opened, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down when playing right-handed, when vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, slight sliding wear occurs. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in a connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. The operation of is described. For example, in FIG. 175, when a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. The size of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where magnetism is not detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Will be lifted. In FIG. 175, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. .. Then, when the voltage lifted by the contact resistor RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 deployed on the panel relay board 4161, there is a possibility that the sensor signal may be erroneously detected when the contact resistance RR is generated.

[17-3. Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 176 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the first embodiment in the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 175. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shall be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the large winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

The difference between the magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment and the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit is that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164, it is in a non-detection state. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) pulled down to the ground side by the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR and lower than the first voltage is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 A voltage raising unit 4166 is provided to avoid the above problem, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the front stage of the connection part. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[17-3-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS unit detects magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is in such an abnormal state, in the above example, when it is determined that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a is peripheral. An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and a process for outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the voice, or the like.

[17-3-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Is lifted. In FIG. 176, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by flowing a current through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command with a magnet. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the warning display, the voice, etc. are notified that an illegal game act using the above is performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected. To do. In addition, an error signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer.

[17-4. Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 177 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit installed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 175, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 has a first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output section 4163 and one end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and the other end is grounded. It is configured to include a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 175, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged after the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point of the transistor ITR0 with the base terminal. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[17-4-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage lowered to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising section 4166 A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[17-4-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Is lifted. In FIG. 177, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, when a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1 and further this current flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage drops to the ground, and the second resistor Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage remains off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

[17-5. Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 178 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit installed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 175, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 comprises two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. And the resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5 are included. Compared with the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 connected in series instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit, respectively. You are connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising portion 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

Further, the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the first stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the second stage. Further, the collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are set at one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 in which + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[17-5-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). By connecting the base terminal of the transistor to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistance IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5, and a pull-up resistor IR0 and a voltage raising section 4166 resistance IR1 are applied. A current flows to the ground via the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the latter transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[17-5-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Is lifted. In FIG. 178, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, when a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. .. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1 and further, this current flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and most of the current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistance IR1. It does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage does not turn on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on to detect the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the voltage output unit 4163 provided for each is provided with a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available product, TOSHIBA). Can be used by connecting to (manufactured).

Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 deployed on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member. It suffices as long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor by means of various sensors, for example, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact. It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

[17-6. Application example to which the sensor signal input unit 4162 can be applied]
The sensor signal input units 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 described above have been described as preventing erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance generated when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable portion of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

As described above, in a game machine, there is a situation in which detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, they are arranged in the vicinity of a start port, a winning port, a large winning port, an out port, etc.). .. Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, the transistor on the panel relay board) that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor has various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. The length of is selected as appropriate. Regarding this point, it will take various forms depending on the model of the game machine.

By the way, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes due to the change in resistance value due to the secular change of the used electrical parts (for example, connector and detection sensor) and wiring pattern, and the length of the wiring (harness). If it is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes due to a specification change during development, for example, when the type of detection sensor, the arrangement location, and the length of the wiring (harness) are changed in design. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. In addition, depending on the location of the detection sensor, the extension of the length of the harness, or the location of the harness, there may be places where noise is easily picked up, and the degree of influence of noise also changes.

If a current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a situation, the current flowing through the detection sensor may differ from the original design value. That is, there is a risk of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor. Further, due to the influence of noise, the circuit may not operate normally, and the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 of the first to third embodiments is of the electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) used, the aging of the wiring pattern, and the wiring (harness). Even when the resistance value changes depending on the length, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In the conventional example of FIG. 175 and the embodiment of FIG. 176, the changing resistance value is shown by a two-dot chain line.

In the following, the case where noise is placed on the harness will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 181 (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 181 (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 181 (A) is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when there is noise.

As shown in FIG. 181 (A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the level is low (0.4V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 175 is turned on. It is possible to maintain a level lower than the voltage (0.8V). When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the level is high (12V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is placed, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform is the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as shown by the hatched portion. ) Is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

Further, not limited to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 181 (A), when overshoot occurs, false detection does not occur in the state where magnetism is detected, but when undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. I can't keep it off. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

As shown in FIG. 181 (B), in the embodiment, the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of FIG. 176 is raised to 2V as an example of the voltage higher than 0.8V by the voltage raising unit 4166. Has been done. In the absence of noise, the detection operation is low level (0.4V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, which is lower than the raised voltage 2V, so the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on. A level lower than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V) and is higher than the raised voltage of 2V. Therefore, the voltage raising unit 4166 is turned on and the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. The level becomes higher than 8V), and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. However, since the voltage is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, the voltage raising portion 4166 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 182 (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 182 (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 182 (A) is a signal waveform input in a normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform input when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging.

In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging, the input voltage is a transistor as shown in the hatched portion even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Since the voltage (0.8V) at which ITR0 is turned on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when the voltage rises due to the resistance value rising due to aging, the transistor ITR0 is turned on as the input voltage when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Even if the voltage (0.8V) is exceeded, the voltage is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, so that the voltage raising unit 4166 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

As described above, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise. Further, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 includes a voltage raising unit 4166, noise may occur if the location of the detection sensor is changed, the length of the harness is extended, or the location where the harness is routed is changed. The sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up. Therefore, the circuit units (sensor signal input unit 4162 and detection circuit unit 4164) provided on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to have a margin for design changes during development.

[17-7. Sensor signal input unit 4162'] of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Examples 1 to 3 described above includes a built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR turns on when magnetism is not detected, while the built-in magnetometer STR turns on when magnetism is detected. The transistor STR is turned off. In other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a transistor whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected. Instead, a magnetic sensor that has a high input when no magnetism is detected and a low input when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetometer that turns off when no magnetism is detected and turns on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

FIG. 183 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and turns on when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value.

The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Further, the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

As the voltage raising unit 4166, those of Examples 1 to 3 described above can be used. In this other embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164'is composed of the transistor ITR0. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and is connected to the pull-up resistor NR to which + 12V is applied to one end. There is. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 constitute the sensor signal input unit 4162', and the transistor ITR0 constitutes the detection circuit unit 4164'.

[17-7-1. Detection operation when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the Langista ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[17-7-2. Detection operation in case of abnormality due to change in resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, so the Zener diode ZD0 There is no effect on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the above, and the transistor ITR0 is still turned on. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164'.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[17-8. Example of arranging a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 on the panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 184 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. As shown in FIG. 184, an example is shown in which the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 185 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay board 4161), and the voltage output unit 4163 is arranged on another substrate (for example, a sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

Further, in FIG. 186, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is arranged on another substrate (for example, main control board 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit configuration. As described above, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be changed in various ways.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with aging and the wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is composed of the magnetic detection sensors 4024 of Examples 1 to 3 in FIG. 184.

The voltage output unit 4163 outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, while the second voltage output unit 4163 is a voltage lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 184, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4V), while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. When, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

The detection circuit unit 4164 switches the output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. Since the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 184 uses the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

Then, with respect to the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (for example, 12V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage lower than (as an example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 182) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising unit 4166 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163, and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). .. In this example, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 arranged after the voltage output unit 4163. Further, a plurality of voltage raising units 4166, ... Each of which is electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS are the bases of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

In FIG. 184, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, and thereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. Is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneous detection of any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to consider the resistance value that changes as shown in the figure. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) for various types of game machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to design changes during development and reduction of man-hours related to manufacturing.

FIG. 187 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment described with reference to FIG. 183 are provided, and the plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. Further, in FIG. 187, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is configured. In another example of FIG. 187, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor. When the MGS does not detect magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12V).

On the other hand, FIG. 187 is different in that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V because the detection circuit unit 4164'described in another embodiment is used, and + 12V is formed at one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which is applied.

In FIG. 187, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164'turns off, and thereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns on. is there.

[18. Characteristic game control and production control]
The characteristic game control and effect control of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

[18-1. Summary of control]
As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310. ) Is controlled.

Further, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. It is also possible to determine the type of effect pattern that appears in. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for missed reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuation. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be given, and in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol finally stops confirming the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The effect developed to be displayed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation performed when it is determined that the jackpot game is not given, and in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol finally stops confirming the out-of-order symbol after the reach effect. The effect developed to be displayed is executed. The out-of-order variation is a variation that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot game is not given, and in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol finally determines the out-of-order symbol without going through the reach effect. An effect that is developed so as to stop and display is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

Next, processing performed in the process of step 114 related to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. 148, in the process of step 116 related to the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, and the like will be described. ..

The main control MPU 1310a executes a special symbol start process for starting the variation of the special symbol when the symbol variation is not being executed and the jackpot game is not being executed. In this special symbol start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of second reserved storages stored in the main control MPU 1310a is larger than "0". When the second reserved storage number is "1" or more, the display content of the function display unit 1400 is displayed so that the second reserved storage number is subtracted by "1" and the updated (after subtraction) second reserved storage number is displayed. Control. Then, the main control MPU 1310a executes a jackpot determination on the second special symbol side.

On the other hand, when the second reserved storage number is "0", the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the first reserved storage number stored in the main control MPU 1310a is larger than "0". .. When the first reserved storage number is "1" or more, the display content of the function display unit 1400 is displayed so that the first reserved storage number is subtracted by "1" and the updated (after subtraction) first reserved storage number is displayed. Control. Then, the main control MPU 1310a executes the first big hit determination process.

As described above, when both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "1" or more, the main control MPU 1310a preferentially performs the second jackpot determination process to cause the second side symbol change. It will be executed with priority.

When the main control MPU 1310a makes a big hit determination on the first special symbol side, first, a random number for big hit determination that is associated with the first reserved storage number and is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main control MPU 1310a. Read the value. Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not both values match by comparing the value of the random number for jackpot determination associated with the first reserved storage number and the jackpot determination value based on the probability variation flag. Do. That is, as described above, the main control MPU 1310a according to the present embodiment can change the jackpot winning probability so that the jackpot determination can be performed in the low probability state in the non-probability state and in the high probability state in the probability variation state. The probability change flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability change state is controlled.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination is affirmative, the main control MPU1310a sets a jackpot flag indicating that the symbol variation is a jackpot, and executes the first jackpot time variation process for executing the symbol variation that is a jackpot. .. In the first jackpot time variation process, the main control MPU1310a reads the value of the jackpot symbol random number (symbol random number) associated with the first reserved storage number, and based on the value of the jackpot symbol random number (symbol random number), The jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is determined, and the type of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol is determined. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the fluctuation patterns for jackpot fluctuations based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag. This operation flag is a flag indicating whether it is in the first time saving state, the second time saving state, or the non-time saving state. After that, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is negative, the main control MPU 1310a reads the value of the reach determination random number associated with the first reserved storage number, and also reads the value of the reach determination random number and the reach determination value. Are compared, and reach judgment is made as to whether or not both values match. As the reach determination value, different values are mainly determined depending on whether or not a probability change state or a time saving state is given, the number of reserved memories after subtraction, etc., and it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect. Probability of doing may be different.

When the determination result of the reach determination is affirmative, the main control MPU1310a executes the first reach-time variation processing for executing the symbol variation which is the out-of-reach variation because the reach determination is won. In the first reach fluctuation processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines the out-of-order symbol as a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403, and based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag, out of the out-of-reach variation variation patterns. Select one and decide. After that, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the reach determination is negative, the main control MPU1310a does not win the reach determination, and therefore executes the first deviation time variation processing for executing the symbol variation which is the deviation variation. In the first deviation processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines the deviation symbol as the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the deviation pattern for deviation variation based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag. After that, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a makes a big hit determination on the second special symbol side, first, the big hit stored in a predetermined storage area in the main control MPU 1310a is associated with the second reserved storage number. Read the value of the judgment random number. Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not both values match by comparing the value of the random number for jackpot determination associated with the second reserved storage number and the jackpot determination value based on the probability variation flag. Do.

If the determination result of the jackpot determination is affirmative, the main control MPU1310a sets a jackpot flag indicating that the symbol variation is a jackpot, and executes a second jackpot time variation process for executing the symbol variation that is a jackpot. .. In the second jackpot time variation process, the main control MPU1310a reads the value of the jackpot symbol random number (symbol random number) associated with the second reserved storage number, and based on the value of the jackpot symbol random number (symbol random number), The jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 is determined, and the type of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol is determined. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the fluctuation patterns for jackpot fluctuations based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag. After that, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is negative, the main control MPU 1310a reads the value of the reach determination random number associated with the second reserved storage number, and also reads the value of the reach determination random number and the reach determination value. Are compared, and reach judgment is made as to whether or not both values match.

If the determination result of the reach determination is affirmative, the main control MPU1310a has won the reach determination, and therefore executes the second reach-time variation processing for executing the symbol variation that is the out-of-reach variation. In the second reach fluctuation processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines the out-of-order symbol as a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1405, and based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag, out of the out-of-reach variation variation patterns. Select one and decide. After that, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the reach determination is negative, the main control MPU1310a does not win the reach determination, and therefore executes the second deviation time variation processing for executing the symbol variation which is the deviation variation. In the second deviation processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines the deviation symbol as the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1405. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the deviation pattern for deviation variation based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag. After that, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

After that, in a process different from the special symbol start process, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control command generated according to the decision items determined in the special symbol start process to the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) at a predetermined timing. .. More specifically, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a command indicating the type of the special symbol, the determined variation pattern, the result information of the jackpot determination, and the like when starting the symbol variation. After that, when the timing for stopping the symbol variation arrives, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a symbol stop command.

When the big hit is won, the main control MPU 1310a shifts to the following processing in order to start the big hit game according to the symbol type after the end of the symbol variation based on the determined variation pattern. That is, the main control MPU 1310a first outputs an opening command after stopping the symbol variation. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a round command each time a round game is started. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs an ending command after the lapse of the interval time when the last round game is completed. Then, the main control MPU 1310a clears the jackpot flag after the lapse of the ending time, and ends the jackpot game. When the main control MPU 1310a wins a big hit, the main control MPU 1310a outputs an open signal to the actuator when opening the big winning opening 2005, and outputs a closing signal to the actuator when closing the big winning opening 2005. Output.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a controls the game state related to the probability change state and the time saving state by controlling the probability change flag, the operation flag, or the number of operations.
Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a clears the probability change flag, the operation flag, and the number of operations (sets "0") at the start of the big hit game regardless of the type of the big hit game. This number of operations is a counter for counting the number of times the time saving state is given.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the probability change flag when the probability change state is given after the end of the big hit game, while clears the probability change flag when the probability change state is not given.

Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether to grant the first time saving state, the second time saving state, or not to give the time saving state based on the type of the winning jackpot. Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value indicating that the first time saving state is given to the operation flag when the first time saving state is given, and sets the second time saving state when giving the second time saving state. Set the operation flag to a value indicating that the state is to be given. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1310a clears the operation flag when the time saving state is not given after the jackpot game is completed. By controlling in this way, the main control MPU 1310a switches between controlling in the first time saving state, controlling in the second time saving state, and controlling in the non-time saving state. Then, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a time saving designation command corresponding to the operation flag to the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). The time saving designation command is a command indicating whether the first time saving state is given, the second time saving state is given, or the time saving state is not given.

Further, when the time saving state is given with a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) as the upper limit of the main control MPU 1310a, a value indicating the number of times is set as the number of operations to be predetermined in the main control MPU 1310a. Set to the storage area of. Further, the main control MPU 1310a subtracts "1" from the number of operations at the start of the symbol change (or at the end of the symbol change), and when the value becomes "0", clears the operation flag and surrounds the time saving end command. Output to the control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU1511a). This time saving end command is a command indicating that the time saving state has ended. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets data indicating that when a time saving state is given until the next big hit game occurs.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 1310a executes a normal symbol start process for starting the normal symbol change when the normal symbol change is not being executed and the normal hit game is not being executed. In this normal symbol start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols stored in the main control MPU 1310a is larger than "0". When the number of reserved memory of the normal figure is "1" or more, the number of stored memory of the normal figure is subtracted by "1" and stored in a predetermined storage area in the main control MPU 1310a in association with the number of reserved normal figure. Acquires the value of the random number for normal hit judgment. Then, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the acquired value of the random number for normal hit determination matches the normal hit determination value stored in the main control MPU 1310a, performs a normal hit determination, and determines the determination result. The corresponding normal symbol is determined as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. That is, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a normal hit is achieved based on the satisfaction of the normal starting condition that can be satisfied after the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a determines the winning probability of a normal hit in a low probability state in the non-time saving state and in a high probability state in the time saving state based on the operation flag. Then, the main control MPU 1310a executes various processes related to the normal symbol, such as controlling the display content of the normal symbol display 1402 so as to start the variable display of the normal symbol.

Then, when the main control MPU1310a determines the normal hit, the main control MPU 1310a executes the control related to the normal hit game after the symbol variation of the normal symbol is completed. Further, the main control MPU 1310a operates the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 to the open state in an open mode that differs depending on whether or not a time saving state is given when the symbol change of the normal symbol starts. It controls the solenoid 2107.

In particular, when the main control MPU 1310a is in the first time saving state when the normal symbol variation starts, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is operated to the open state according to the first opening pattern illustrated in FIG. 193. It controls the solenoid 2107. On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a is in the second time saving state when the normal symbol fluctuation starts, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 operates in the open state according to the second opening pattern illustrated in FIG. 193. The solenoid 2107 is controlled so as to be operated. When the main control MPU 1310a is in the non-time saving state when the normal symbol change starts, the main control MPU 1310a is selected based on the type of the stop symbol (type of the hit symbol) of the normal symbol change as shown in FIG. 191. According to the 1st open pattern to the 3rd open pattern (see FIG. 193), the normal motor solenoid 2107 is controlled so as to operate the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 to the open state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a controls the distribution solenoid 2109 so that the distribution member 2011b operates in the same operation mode regardless of the gaming state when the normal symbol variation is started after the end of the normal symbol variation.

In this way, the main control MPU 1310a has the movable member 2011a and the distribution member 2011b of the normal electric winning opening 2011 depending on the game state (first time saving state, second time saving state) when the normal symbol fluctuation which is a normal hit starts. The ordinary electric winning opening 2011 including the above is controlled so as to be switchable between a state in which the game ball easily passes through the first operation trigger area and a state in which the game ball easily passes through the second operation trigger area.

Further, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 192, the main control MPU 1310a can select a variation pattern having a different normal symbol variation based on whether or not a time saving state is given. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a controls so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and takes the time required for one normal electric winning opening 2011 to be opened. Can be shortened.

Next, the control contents executed by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) for executing the variable game including various effects will be described below.

When a predetermined control command is input from the main control MPU 1310a at a predetermined timing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs control according to the input control command based on the effect control program.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is attached to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the type of the special symbol indicated by the command from the main control MPU 1310a, the determined fluctuation pattern, the result information of the jackpot determination, and the like. Determine the decorative pattern to be displayed and the effect pattern. That is, the decorative symbols are variably displayed according to the effect pattern determined in this way, and the decorative symbols determined when the all symbol stop command is received are controlled to be fixedly stopped and displayed. The peripheral control MPU1511a can determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, based on the type of the special symbol indicated by the command from the main control MPU1310a, the result information of the jackpot determination, and the like, and by extension, the jackpot. After the end, it is possible to specify whether or not the probability change state, the first time reduction state, and the second time reduction state are given, and the number of time reductions.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not a specific advance notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit appears when the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the determined effect pattern, and determines whether or not a specific advance notice effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree appears, and a specific advance notice is given according to the result of the determination. It is also possible to control the appearance of the production.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the opening command, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the display content of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to execute the opening effect corresponding to the command. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the display contents of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to execute each round effect when the round command is acquired. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the display contents of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to execute the ending effect when the ending command is acquired.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the time saving designation command and the time saving end command, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the value corresponding to the command. Then, when the time saving state is given, the peripheral control MPU1511a counts the number of times the special symbol is executed after the time saving state occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU1511a adds "1" to the number of operations each time the symbol change is executed until the number of executions of the special symbol after the time saving state occurs becomes "100", and recognizes the remaining number of times. Control is performed so that the possible display appears on the game board side effect display device 1600.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a lamp (LED) provided on the door frame 3 based on the type of special symbol indicated by the command from the main control MPU 1310a, the determined fluctuation pattern, the result information of the jackpot determination, the game state, and the like. ), The lamp (LED) provided on the game board 5 is controlled to emit light at a specific timing, and a specific sound (sound effect, music, etc.) is output from the upper speaker 573 and the speaker 921.

[18-2. Directing the non-electric start winning opening in the open state]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 has a driven member that operates in the open state and the closed state. , The limit time from the open state to the closed state is not set, and the open state is reached until a predetermined number of game balls (two in this case, but one may be used) are accepted. It was mentioned above that it is supposed to maintain. Further, as described above, in the jackpot determination (second special symbol) on the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 side, the first starting opening 2002 (first starting winning opening 2002a, first non-) The total number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game when the big hit is obtained is larger than the big hit judgment (first special symbol) on the electric start winning opening 2002b) side, and the second time is shortened after the big hit is completed. It is considered to be a significantly advantageous game condition, such as a high possibility of being controlled by a state (see FIGS. 190 and 194).

Then, in such a pachinko machine 1, even if the first time is shortened, basically, a big hit on the first start opening 2002 (first start winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) side. Only the judgment (first special symbol) can be executed with high frequency, and even if the jackpot is won, only four rounds of round games are executed. Not only that, even after the big hit game, the second time reduction state is controlled only with a probability of less than 50% (here, 30%), so even if the first time reduction state can be continued for a long period of time. It is clear that it is difficult to win a large number of prize balls.

On the other hand, in the second time saving state, basically, only the big hit judgment (second special symbol) on the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 side can be executed with high frequency. Therefore, if a big hit is won, 16 rounds of round games are executed, and after the big hit game, a second time saving state occurs with a probability of 100% and a probability change state occurs with a probability of 80%. ..

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if it is aimed to acquire a large number of prize balls, there is no choice but to aim to be controlled in the second time saving state, and it is possible to control in this second time saving state. It is extremely important for the player to play the game so that the sex can be improved as much as possible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when shifting from the second time saving state to the normal gaming state (non-time saving state, non-probability changing state), the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is used. It is possible to play so as to keep it in the open state. Then, in this case, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 opened in this way is made to win a prize when it is in the normal gaming state (non-probability changing state) in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is low. The second time saving state is to make a prize after shifting to the first time saving state (probability change state) where there is a high probability that the jackpot judgment will take place, instead of closing the state. It can be said that it is the most effective gaming method to increase the possibility of being controlled. That is, in this case, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) is in the first time saving state (probability change state) in which only the jackpot judgment on the first special symbol side can be expected to be executed. ) The jackpot judgment (second special symbol) on the 2004 side can be digested under high probability conditions, and when the jackpot judgment is won, 16 rounds of round games are executed and the game is executed. After the big hit game, the second time saving state can be generated with a 100% probability and the probability variation state can be generated with an 80% probability.

Therefore, when the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 can be maintained in the open state when shifting from the second time saving state to the normal gaming state (non-time saving state, non-probability change state). In spite of the transition from the most advantageous gaming state to the most unfavorable gaming state for the player, "Let's do our best until the big hit is obtained again", the game entertainment when in the normal gaming state. It will be expected to be maintained suitably.

In the background of such a game, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment shifts from the second time saving state to the normal gaming state (non-time saving state, non-probability changing state) at the second starting port (second non-electric). The second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state, non-probability changing state), or to urge the opening of the starting winning opening (2) 2004 (see FIG. 197). It is possible to control the appearance of an image display (see FIG. 196) related to the state.

[18-2-1. First production example]
FIGS. 195 and 196 show the above-mentioned game board side effect display in relation to the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 being open in the normal game state (non-time saving state, non-probability change state). It is an image display that can appear in the device 1600. In addition, in FIGS. 195 and 196, the content of the effect (including the background image) that changes every moment during the reach effect in the figure is described by a white notation such as "reach effect" for convenience of explanation. expressing.

That is, as described above, when the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state in the normal game state (non-time saving state, non-probability change state), in the normal game state (non-probability change state). The second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is prevented from winning, and its open state is maintained until a big hit game state occurs, or until a first time saving state and a probability change state occur. It is desirable to try to do so (try not to reach the maximum number of prizes).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the first sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball flowing down the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and the second starting port (not shown). A second sensor (not shown) for detecting that the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state is provided. Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, whether or not there is a game ball that acquires the detection signals from these first sensor and the second sensor and flows down the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the second start port (second start port). It is determined whether or not the non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state. The first sensor is provided on the upstream side of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011.

According to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is hit right when it is in the open state (the second starting port in the open state (second starting port (open state)). It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in a closed state), and a specific image display can be displayed when the risky situation occurs. It will be possible.

Further, when the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state in the normal gaming state, theoretically, the game is played in the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. Even if it is beneficial for the player to keep the ball out of the ball, it seems that it is clearly beneficial for the player to hit right. Moreover, when hitting right, a game ball can be entered into the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 with a higher probability of entering the ball than when hitting left. Therefore, it is clear that it is actually more beneficial for the player to hit right if the future profit is ignored and only the current profit is seen.

Nevertheless, if the player makes a right-handed hit that he / she finds useful, a specific image display will appear indicating that a situation that is disadvantageous to the player has occurred, which will give a big impression to the player. In the future, at least a profit larger than the immediate profit (profit that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 with a high probability in the normal game state) You will be able to recognize that you will secure it. As a result, it becomes possible to motivate the player to continue the game until such a large profit can be obtained, and it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when in the normal game state. It will be expected.

As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment has a configuration capable of controlling light emission toward the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. However, even when the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state in the normal gaming state, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is directed toward the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. The light emission is not controlled, and the presence of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is made inconspicuous.

Here, the specific image display promotes the maintenance of a state in which the possibility of being controlled in the second time saving state can be increased as much as possible, and functions as extremely important game information for the player. Therefore, with respect to the specific image display, when it is recognized that the above-mentioned risky situation has occurred in the normal gaming state, the game board is irrespective of the effect situation of the game board side effect display device 1600 at that time. It is desirable to control the side effect display device 1600 so that it appears. Therefore, in the game board side effect display device 1600, when the decorative symbol does not fluctuate and the effect for the big hit is not performed, or when the decorative pattern fluctuates and the effect for the big hit is performed. However, when the above-mentioned risky situation occurs, a specific image display will appear on the game board side effect display device 1600.

For example, in the normal game state, the number of reservations on the second special symbol side is "0", and as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the degree of expectation that a big hit can be obtained in the game board side effect display device 1600. It is assumed that the reach effect (the effect according to the jackpot judgment on the first special symbol side) is being performed to indicate that the value is high. In such a situation, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment is shown in FIG. 195 (b) even when the player is right-handed to obtain the hold on the second special symbol side. As described above, a specific indication that a chance disappearance risk (risk of closing the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) has occurred based on the detection of a right-handed game ball. By controlling the appearance of the image display, the player is urged to interrupt the disadvantageous right-handed hit and return to the left-handed hit.

In this production example, a ally character and a notation such as "chance disappearance risk occurs !!" appear as a specific image display, but only one of these may be used. In addition, as a more direct expression, "the risk of losing a chance has occurred !!" may be, for example, a reminder to stop right-handed hitting or a reminder to hit a non-right-handed hit.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, when the display area overlaps with the image display (reach effect image) appearing as the reach effect, the specific image display appearing in this way is a part of the reach effect image ( Even if the background image related to the reach effect is hidden, it is displayed preferentially, so that the seriousness of the matter (the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed. It is intended to encourage the player to recognize (which may become) as soon as possible.

However, the peripheral control MPU1511a avoids a place where the result display of the reach effect (the display position of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped) appears, as shown together with FIGS. 196 (e) and 196 (g). As such, a specific image display is made to appear. Therefore, even if a specific image display appears when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, a part of the decorative symbol that has been fixedly stopped is not hidden by the specific image display. ..

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, after the appearance of a specific image display indicating that the risk of chance disappearance has occurred, the right-handed game ball is the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening). ) It is decided to control the appearance of an image display that is accepted by 2004 and can recognize whether or not it has been closed.

In this production example, after the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appears, first, a state in which an enemy character appearing as the specific image display fires a bullet is projected (not shown). Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (c), a state in which the bullet thus fired is directed toward the ally character (whether or not the ally character can avoid the bullet) is projected. As a result, when two game balls are accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed, the figure shows. As shown in 196 (d), an image display in which a bullet hits a friendly character and collapses appears.

As a result, two game balls are inserted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 while the reach effect (one symbol change according to the jackpot judgment on the first special symbol side) is being performed. Is accepted, and the player can recognize that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 has been closed (or is likely to be). That is, in this case, it is strongly hoped that the reach effect currently being performed to make up for the loss will be a big hit, and the reach effect (one symbol according to the big hit judgment on the first special symbol side). You will be able to maintain your interest in playing games by strengthening your feelings for fluctuations. In addition, after the reach production ends with a loss, it will be recognized that an production according to the jackpot judgment on the second special symbol side (a production that shifts to the second time saving state if a jackpot occurs) will appear. , While regretting that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 has been closed, it becomes possible to generate a sense of expectation for the production in advance.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) is performed within the period during which the reach effect (one symbol variation according to the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side) is performed. When (an image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and collapses) appears, as shown in FIG. 196 (e), the reach effect (one time according to the jackpot judgment on the first special symbol side) The same image display (image display in which a bullet hits a ally character and collapses) is maintained without being erased until the effect result (decorative stop mode of the decorative symbol) appears in the pattern variation). As a result, while regretting that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 was closed, the next production (the production according to the jackpot judgment on the second special symbol side (advantageous side)) You will be able to continue your expectations for.

As for the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) (the image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and collapses), even if a part of the reach effect image is concealed, this can be used as in the above specific image display. While it is displayed preferentially, it is displayed at a position where a part of the decorative pattern that has been fixedly stopped is not hidden.

In addition, regarding the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) (the image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and collapses), the reach effect (one symbol change according to the jackpot judgment on the first special symbol side) After the production result of (decorative symbol confirmation stop mode) appears, the display is maintained even after the next production is started by digesting the hold on the second special symbol side. , It may be hidden in the next production. In addition, if the display is to be maintained even after the next production is started, it may interfere with the production. Therefore, the position where the image display is displayed may be moved to another position or its size. It is desirable to change.

On the other hand, although it was hit to the right, the game ball was not accepted by the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the open state of the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 was maintained. When this is done, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) does not appear after the display image shown in FIG. 195 (c) appears. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 196 (f), when the game ball is not accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, no display image regarding the result is displayed. It is supposed to be controlled to.

That is, if the game ball is not accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 and the open state of the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is maintained, the game is played. Concerns for the person disappear completely, and the interest shifts to reach production. Therefore, if the open state of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is displayed as a result, it is frustrating that it is difficult to confirm the reach effect to which the interest has changed. There is a concern that the interest in games will decline as they are recruited.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, although the player is hit right, the game ball is not accepted in the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004, and the second start port (second non-electric start) When the open state of the winning opening) 2004 is maintained, as shown in FIGS. 196 (f) and 196 (g), the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning prize) is maintained until the reach effect is completed. Mouth) Since the result display regarding the maintenance of the open state of 2004 is prevented from appearing, it is expected to maintain the game entertainment when the reach effect is being performed.

According to such a first effect example, an effect pattern corresponding to one symbol variation according to a jackpot determination on the first special symbol side is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Occasionally, another effect unrelated to the jackpot determination or symbol variation will suddenly start in the same display area. Therefore, it is expected to maintain the hobby of the game when it is difficult to obtain a big hit.

Moreover, the effect that is suddenly started in this way is the game risk generated by the player's intention (operation) (two game balls in the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 as a specific disadvantageous event). It is related to (whether or not it was accepted and closed), and it can be generated at an appropriate timing according to the player's intention (operation), so it affects the game value when it is difficult to get a big hit. You will be able to create and enjoy the exciting effects that you exert yourself.

In other words, according to the first production example described above, a predetermined detrimental event (second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) is performed within the period in which the reach effect corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed. The above reach effect is performed with a disadvantageous concern effect (specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b)) suggesting that two game balls are accepted and closed). It can be executed within a predetermined display area (display area of the game board side effect display device 1600). Therefore, even if it is difficult to maintain the sense of expectation and maintain the interest of the game only by the reach production according to the jackpot judgment, the production that makes you aware of the disadvantage that is the opposite of the expectation for the game ( By generating the disadvantageous concern effect) in the same display area, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest and realize a highly stimulating effect.

Moreover, according to the above-mentioned second production example, a predetermined detrimental event (two game balls are accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 and are closed) occurs. In the case of the above, as a result display of the above-mentioned disadvantageous concern effect (see FIG. 195 (b)) while the reach effect is being executed in the predetermined display area (display area of the game board side effect display device 1600). An image display (see FIG. 196 (d)) that makes it recognizable that a predetermined disadvantageous event has occurred can appear, whereas if a predetermined disadvantageous event does not occur, a predetermined display area (see FIG. 196 (d)). While the reach effect is being executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, the result display itself of the above-mentioned disadvantageous concern effect is prevented from appearing (see FIG. 196 (f)). That is, in this case, even if it is difficult to maintain the sense of expectation only by the production according to the result of the jackpot judgment (here, the reach production) and it is difficult to maintain the game interest, what is the expectation for the game? By generating an effect that makes the player aware of the opposite disadvantage (disadvantage concern effect) in the same display area, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player and realize a highly stimulating effect. Further, since it is not possible to definitively recognize that the predetermined disadvantageous event does not occur in the predetermined display area (display area of the game board side effect display device 1600), the above-mentioned predetermined disadvantageous event occurs. It becomes possible to maintain a feeling of excitement about when an image display (see FIG. 196 (d)), which is recognized as having been done, appears for a long time. Further, when the player recognizes that a predetermined disadvantageous event does not occur, the player shifts his / her interest to the above-mentioned reach production, but it is difficult to see the reach production to which the interest has shifted by displaying the result of the above-mentioned disadvantageous concern production. It will be possible to avoid such things as doing.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 may be modified and executed as follows.

For example, in the above-mentioned production example, when the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed, the display image shown in FIG. 196 (d) is made to appear, but instead of this. First, based on the fact that the first game ball was accepted at the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the margin up to the closing upper limit (2 pieces) was lost and the risk increased. As a result, an image display appears in which a bullet hits an ally character and kneels. After that, based on the fact that the second game ball was accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the closing upper limit (two) was reached and the second starting port (second). Assuming that the non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is closed, control may be performed so that an image display in which a ally character collapses appears.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to express the progress of the degree of risk until the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed, so that the reach effect is performed. At that time, it becomes possible to realize an image display at the time of risk as a progressive effect that is not inferior to the content of the reach effect.

Also in this case, when the game ball is not accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, it is desirable that no display image regarding the result appears.

On the other hand, when only the first game ball is accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened. It will be maintained, but since the margin to the closing upper limit (2 pieces) is lost and the risk is increasing, at least the reach production (one symbol according to the jackpot judgment on the first special symbol side) It is desirable to continue displaying the image in which the ally character kneels until the end of the fluctuation). As a result, while recognizing that the risk is increasing, it is possible to continue the expectation that the next production will be based on the jackpot judgment on the second special symbol side.

Also, regarding the image display in which the ally character kneels (the image display indicating that the risk has increased), the display is maintained even after the next production is started by digesting the hold on the second special symbol side. It may be hidden in the next production. Further, when the display is to be maintained even after the next production is started, it is desirable to move the position where the image display is displayed to another position or change the size thereof.

In addition, when adopting the production method that expresses the progress of the degree of risk in this way, the game board is based on the fact that the first game ball is accepted in the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004. The side effect display device 1600 displays an image display in which a ally character kneels, and the game board side effect is based on the fact that the second game ball is accepted in the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004. In the display device 1600, the display of the image display in which the ally character kneels may be maintained without being erased, and the image display in which the ally character collapses may be displayed separately.

According to such a configuration, even if the player overlooks the progress of the degree of risk until the two game balls are accepted in the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004. , It became possible to grasp the progress of the degree of risk from the final display mode, and by extension, two game balls were accepted at the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 and closed. You will be able to grasp what has happened.

When the progress of the degree of risk is expressed by a plurality of image displays (kneeling image display, collapsing image display) in this way, the timing of erasing the image displays appearing separately may be the same or different. However, it is possible to maintain this without erasing within the symbol variation in which at least a plurality of image displays appear, which is the symbol variation on the side that is advantageous to the player in the next symbol variation (second special symbol). ) Will be able to sustain the expectation that it will be done. In addition, when the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed (when two game balls are accepted), the design change on the side advantageous to the player (second) as a compensation. Considering that two special symbols) are executed twice in a row, it is possible to hide the image displays (kneeling image display, collapsed image display) that appear separately within separate symbol fluctuations. It is more desirable to maintain the expectation that favorable pattern fluctuations will occur over time.

However, in this case, the same ally character will be displayed in two operating conditions (kneeling, collapsing) on one display screen, leaving a sense of incongruity. It may be changed to the display method which increases according to. For example, based on the acceptance of the first game ball in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the first blood stain image, and the first Based on the acceptance of the second game ball in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the second bloodstain image is displayed separately without erasing the first bloodstain image. By doing so, it is possible to express how the scratches received by the specific character gradually increase.

Further, the important point in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 is that "the second start port (second non-electric start) is in an open state even when the reach effect is performed. (Winning opening) A specific image display appears when there is a risk that 2004 will be closed (Fig. 195 (b)) "and" The number required to be closed (here, 2) (Fig. 195 (d), Fig. 195 (f)) ", so that the image display of whether or not the game ball of No. The image display shown in) is not always necessary, and this may be omitted. That is, in this case, after the image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appears, the image display shown in either FIG. 195 (d) or FIG. 195 (f) appears.

Further, among the production examples shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, a specific example is specified when there is a risk that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state will be closed. When the image display appears (FIG. 195 (b)), it is desirable to output a predetermined sound effect or music related thereto. At this time, after changing the predetermined sound effect or music generated by the reach effect to a lower volume, the predetermined sound effect or music related to the specific image display is output at a louder volume. It is more desirable to do so.

In addition, if a specific image display is made to appear only when there is a risk that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state will be closed, a specific image will be displayed. There is a concern that a player who has never seen the display will have a risk of disappearing once by hitting right. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it seems that it is clearly more beneficial for the player to hit right from the viewpoint (the second starting port (the second non-electric starting winning opening) in the normal gaming state. ) 2004 is open), so such concerns are even more so. Therefore, at least for the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b), the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 can be made to appear regardless of whether or not it is in the open state. Desirably, in this case, the second sensor is not always necessary.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the specific display image is displayed at a position that overlaps with the reach effect image, but the specific display image may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the reach effect image.

[18-2-1-1. When the first production example spans multiple fluctuations]
As described above, since the first effect example is generated at an appropriate timing depending on the intention (operation) of the player, depending on the timing when the effect is started, the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side is performed. It will be displayed over multiple symbol fluctuations.

However, in this case, if the definite stop of the decorative symbol that appears due to each symbol variation is difficult to see due to an effect unrelated to the jackpot determination, the effect of whether or not it is a jackpot cannot be enjoyed. The motivation to continue the game may be lost. Therefore, the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b), the image display shown in FIGS. 196 (d) and 196 (e) (the image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and collapses, and the above-mentioned related items thereof. For each image display (kneeling image display, etc.) shown in the modified example of, it is desirable to display only the part that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped.

According to such a configuration, when it is difficult to obtain a big hit, for example, it is an effect that straddles two symbol fluctuations (big hit judgment) and has nothing to do with any of those symbol fluctuations (big hit judgment). It will also be possible to create and enjoy exciting productions that affect the game value according to the player's own intentions.

Further, when the first effect example is executed across two symbol fluctuations (big hit determination), the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appears within the first symbol variation (big hit determination). On the other hand, the image display shown in FIG. 195 (d) (the image display in which the bullet hits the ally character and collapses, and the image display shown in the above-mentioned modification related to this (kneeling image display) Etc.)) will appear within the second symbol variation (big hit judgment).

In this regard, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) (an image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and collapses, and each image display (kneeling image display, etc.) shown in the above-mentioned modification related thereto). With respect to, at least until the symbol variation in which the image display appears (here, the second symbol variation) is completed (or even after the next symbol variation is started, it continues within the next symbol variation. (Erase with) It is a big hit judgment of the side (second special symbol side) where the next symbol variation is advantageous after the symbol variation in which the image display appears is to be continuously displayed without being erased. As mentioned above, it is desirable to maintain the expectation of the matter. That is, in this case, even if the time from the appearance of the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) to the appearance of the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) is the same, FIG. 196 (d) The timing at which the image display shown in the above appears is "within the symbol variation that was fluctuating when the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appeared", or "the next after the symbol variation is completed". Since the time required for the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) to be erased varies greatly depending on whether or not the pattern variation has started, the same effect has different contents. It will be possible to make it look like a production, and it will be expected to maintain the interest of the game.

In particular, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) makes it possible to grasp that two game balls have been accepted by the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 and have been closed. It functions as a result display, but when the second symbol variation in which the result display appears takes a longer time than the first symbol variation, the second start port (second non-electric) The result display is longer than the time when the effect (such as the effect shown in FIG. 195 (b)) indicating whether or not two game balls are accepted and closed in 2004 is displayed in the start winning opening) 2004. The time it appears is longer. That is, in this case, there is a feeling of expectation that the second symbol change will result in a big hit, and even if the second symbol change does not result in a big hit, the next symbol change (third symbol change) is more advantageous (the third symbol change). It will be possible to enjoy the expectation that it is based on the jackpot judgment of the second special symbol side) for a long time, and it will be expected to maintain the hobby of the game.

According to such a configuration, one production of whether or not a predetermined production result (image display shown in FIG. 196 (d)) unrelated to the production (reach production) according to the jackpot determination appears. The result display (image display shown in FIG. 196 (d)) is executed while the symbol change is being performed, and the result display (FIG. 196) is performed while the symbol change is being performed once. In addition to the possibility that the image display shown in (d) is not executed, in these two cases, the control mode related to the display of the predetermined effect result (FIG. 196 (d)). The time it takes for the image display shown to maintain its appearance) is different.

That is, in this case, by paying attention to the effect (see FIG. 195 (b)) that is performed by a procedure completely different from the effect according to the jackpot determination (reach effect), only a certain control procedure has been used so far. Not only will it be possible to distract the player's eyes for a while from the "directing according to the jackpot judgment" that was performed and there was concern about becoming a rut, but also the above-mentioned certain control procedure for the player You will be able to instill a sense that the production will proceed in a different procedure. Therefore, when the situation is returned to the situation where the production (reach production) according to the jackpot judgment is refocused, the concern about the production becoming a rut is resolved, and it is expected that the game interest is maintained.

The time for the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) to maintain its appearance is until the symbol variation in which the image display appears is completed, or the next symbol variation in which the symbol variation is completed is executed. As mentioned above, it is desirable to be within the period. That is, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) means that two game balls are accepted by a predetermined detrimental event (second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 and are closed. ) Can be recognized, while the event that is advantageous to the player (big hit judgment on the side that is advantageous to the player (big hit judgment on the second special symbol side) is as follows. Because it is an image with a special property that makes it possible to recognize that (what is done by pattern fluctuation) has occurred, the control mode related to the effect related to the image display is characteristic. It can be said that it is.

[18-2-2. Second production example]
FIG. 197 is an image display that can appear on the game board side effect display device 1600 when it is in the second time saving state and the non-probability changing state.

That is, it is assumed that the 100th symbol change is started after being controlled to the second time saving state and the non-probability changing state. Then, in the game board side effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the three symbol rows based on the determination result of the big hit.

However, as described above, the second time-saving state and non-probability change state are terminated when the 100th symbol change is stopped due to the loss change, and after that, the normal game state (non-time-saving state and non-probability state). Probability change state) will occur (see FIGS. 190 and 194). And, as described above, after the normal gaming state (non-time saving state and non-probability changing state) occurs, the second is basically in the closed state, unlike the case where it is controlled to the second time saving state. It cannot be expected that the starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 will be operated in the open state.

Therefore, it is possible to definitively determine that the second time-saving state and the non-probability change state will end, such as when the 100th symbol fluctuation after being controlled to the second time-saving state and the non-probability change state is started by the loss fluctuation. If this happens, an effect is performed to encourage the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 to be held in the open state for the remaining period until the end of the second time saving state and the non-probability change state. It is desirable to do so.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), when the 100th symbol change after being controlled to the second time saving state and the non-probability change state is performed by the loss change, the loss Within the period of fluctuation, it was judged that a new launch of the game ball was in a special game situation that could be disadvantageous to the player, and a specific character GM imitating a gentleman appeared, saying, "Once you can stop hitting right. How about it? There is a merit if you leave it in the open state. ”The control is to display the lines.

That is, in the second time saving state, the player continuously strikes right, but as long as such right strike is continued, the game ball is intermittently accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. As a result, the game ball is intermittently accepted at the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened and closed. The state is not stable after repeating the state. Therefore, in order to shift to the normal gaming state while the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is left open, first, the player's right-handed strike is temporarily stopped. It is desirable to first confirm whether the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state or the closed state.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened by making a specific character GM imitating a gentleman appear within the period of the 100th loss fluctuation. Regardless of whether it is in a state or not, the player is given an opportunity to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball (an opportunity to review the game situation).

Regarding the specific character GM that appears in this way, regardless of whether the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped or whether the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state, the loss is concerned. It is desirable that the display device 1600 on the game board side continuously displays the fluctuations at least until the fluctuations are stopped. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 should be kept open.

However, when such a specific character GM appears over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, it is desirable to perform processing such as changing the display position of the specific character GM as shown in FIG. 197. ..

In addition, when the specific character GM appears over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, for example, it is put into a hold state while the 99th symbol variation is performed after being controlled to the second time saving state and the non-probability change state. This is the case where it is determined in advance that the jackpot has not been won in a certain 100th symbol variation (big hit determination). Even in such a case, since it is possible to definitively determine that the second time saving state and the non-probability change state will end when the 100th symbol variation (big hit determination) is stopped, for example, 99. While the second symbol change is being performed, it is judged that a new launch of the game ball is in a special game situation that may be disadvantageous to the player, and a specific character GM is made to appear (see FIG. 197 (b)). , It is possible to display the specific character GM at the position shown in FIG. 197 (c) when the 100th symbol change is performed.

In addition, although it is a game progress pattern that does not exist in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if a big hit (second special symbol) is won in the second time saving state, there is a predetermined probability (depending on the symbol type). If there is a progress pattern of the game that shifts to the non-time saving state, the second time saving state and the non-probability changing state end when it is determined that the jackpot (second special symbol) has been won in the second time saving state. There is a risk (though not 100%) of doing so. Therefore, even in such a case, it is determined that a new launch of the game ball is in a special game situation that may be disadvantageous to the player in the period until the jackpot symbol appears, and the specific character GM is made to appear. (2) Whether the starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is open or not, the player is given an opportunity to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball (a chance to review the game situation). It is desirable to do.

Also, in such a case, for example, if it is determined in advance that the jackpot determination (second special symbol) in the pending state includes a jackpot that can be obtained, at that time, Since it is possible to definitively determine that an event (big hit game) in which there is a risk that the second time saving state ends and a non-time saving state occurs occurs, for example, a big hit judgment (second special symbol) in which a big hit can be obtained. Judges that a new launch of a game ball that is still on hold is in a special game situation that may be disadvantageous to the player, and causes a specific character GM to appear (see FIG. 197 (b)), and the next symbol change. After that, it is possible to display the specific character GM at the position shown in FIG. 197 (c).

The production example shown in FIG. 197 may be modified and executed as follows.

For example, in the above-mentioned production example, when it is determined that an event (100th stop of symbol change, big hit game) at risk of occurrence of a non-time saving state after the end of the second time saving state is determined, the second starting port (2nd non-electric start winning opening) It was decided to make a specific character GM appear regardless of whether 2004 is in the closed state or the open state, but instead of this, the 2nd starting opening (2nd non-electric start opening) The specific character GM may appear only when the electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state.

Further, regarding the specific character GM, the display mode (for example, blue when the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state and when it is in the closed state (for example, blue when in the open state) is closed. In the state, it may be different (red). According to such a configuration, in addition to being able to give the player an opportunity to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball (a trigger to review the game situation), the current game situation (a situation where the player should hit the right again). It will be possible to display (whether or not it is in).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the specific character GM is continuously displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 until a definitely determined event (stop of the 100th symbol change, big hit game) occurs. .. However, since such a specific character GM can interfere with the display effect, the effect of outputting the specific sound for a relatively short time is performed instead of the effect of displaying the specific character GM. May be good. Even with such an effect, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball (an opportunity to review the game situation).

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the specific character GM is made to appear when it is determined that a special game situation in which a new launch of the game ball may be disadvantageous to the player occurs. Even when it is determined that the above occurs, the specific character GM may not necessarily appear. That is, in the situation where such a specific character GM appears, it is implied that some event that has a risk of giving a disadvantage to the player occurs, such as the 100th symbol change starting with a loss change. Although it can be said that the situation is shown in the above, there is a concern that some players may feel that they have been deprived of the enjoyment of the result of the jackpot judgment. Therefore, even when it is determined that a special game situation will occur, it is expected that such a concern will be suppressed by not necessarily causing the specific character GM to appear.

Further, the specific character GM may be realized as a your gentleman effect that can function like a butler suitable for each player's personality. That is, a setting screen is displayed in which the player himself / herself can change the probability of causing the specific character GM to appear when it is determined that a special gaming situation occurs, and the player himself / herself displays the setting screen through this setting screen. If control is performed to make a specific character GM appear with a set probability, it will give an opportunity to review the game situation at a frequency suitable for each player's personality, and it is preferable to maintain the game interest. You will be able to plan. In addition, if the display mode (color, clothes, gender) of the specific character GM can be changed on the above setting screen, it will be more troublesome for each player as a butler suitable for each player's personality. It will be possible to realize a production that makes you see.

[18-2-3. Third production example]
According to the above-mentioned second production example, since the trigger for reviewing the game situation prior to the end of the second time saving state is given by the display of the specific character GM, the second time saving state is given. While being controlled to (a state in which the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 can be operated to the open state with high frequency by hitting right), the second start is described above. It is possible to realize this because there is enough time to play a game in which the mouth (second non-electric start winning mouth) 2004 is adjusted to be held in the open state.

However, even though such a specific character GM is displayed, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is not held in the open state, or the game situation is caused by the above-mentioned Your Gentleman function. If right-handed strikes are continued without being given a chance to review, the second start-up opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 remains closed and the second time-saving state ends and is normal. A situation may occur in which the player shifts to a gaming state (non-time saving state).

When such a situation occurs, basically, the game ball will not be newly accepted in the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. However, if the normal symbol variation started immediately before the end of the second time saving state is executed in a form straddling the above-mentioned normal game state and the normal hit symbol is stopped in the normal game state, the normal electric winning opening 2011 The movable member 2011a operates in the opening pattern (second opening pattern of FIG. 193) adopted in the second time saving state even though it is in the normal gaming state. At this time, if the game ball is inserted into the normal electric winning opening 2011 that is opened in this way (if the game is hit to the right), the second starting opening (second non) is in the normal gaming state. The electric start winning opening) 2004 can be opened. Alternatively, even when the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 operates in the first opening pattern or the third opening pattern of FIG. 193 in the normal gaming state, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened. When the ball enters while in the state, and as a result of the entered game ball colliding with another game ball and being accelerated or decelerated, the time required to reach the distribution member 2011b is different from the assumption. In an extremely rare event, it is possible for the game ball to pass through the second passage 2011e and open the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004.

Therefore, if the game is to be played with the opening of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 as the highest priority, even in the normal gaming state, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011a When the player moves to the open state, it is required to hit right and aim for the ball to enter the normal electric winning opening 2011. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, both the normal electric winning opening 2011 and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 are provided on the path through which the right-handed game ball flows down. Has been done. That is, in this case, when the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 moves to the open state, three game balls are tentatively hit right in succession (at intervals of 0.6 seconds), and the first of them. Even if the game ball of the above is accepted by the normal electric winning opening 2011 and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 can be opened, the second and third game balls are If it is accepted by the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 opened in this way, the closing upper limit (two) will be reached, and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) will be reached. ) There is a possibility that 2004 will soon return to the closed state.

It should be noted that such a situation may occur in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in which the second game ball out of the three continuously fired game balls is the second starting port ( The first gaming ball received in the normal electric winning opening 2011 reaches the second operating trigger area (or the first operating trigger area) before reaching the second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. This is because a structure that allows the flow (the length of the flow path, the shape of the flow path (collision surface, friction surface, etc.), etc.) is adopted. By the way, by adopting such a structure, in the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state), three game balls hit to the right in succession can be inserted into the normal electric winning opening 2011 and the first. 1 Non-electric start winning opening 2002b or second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 can be entered respectively, and smooth game progress can be realized. ..

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, first, when the normal hit symbol is stopped in the normal gaming state, the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the closed state is opened. It monitors whether the minimum number of game balls required to move to the state is hit to the right. Here, since the minimum number required to operate the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the closed state to the open state is one, it is normally electric. In order to operate the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, which is closed when the first sensor provided on the upstream side of the winning opening 2011 detects it, to the open state. It is determined that the minimum number of game balls required for the game has been hit to the right.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the detection by the first sensor is performed in this way, the game ball targeted for the detection does not wait for the elapse of the time required to reach the normal electric winning opening 2011. At the previous timing, the production that encourages the right-handed strike to be interrupted is started. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the game ball detected by the first sensor will not be accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, but this takes into consideration the following concerns. The second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is set to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the opening state is immediately returned to the closed state.

That is, it is urged that the right-handed hit should be interrupted at a timing earlier than this without waiting for the passage of time required for the game ball detected by the first sensor to reach the normal electric winning opening 2011. Even if the production is performed, by the time the player interrupts the right-handed hit according to the production, the launch of the second game ball (launch 0.6 seconds after the launch of the first game ball) has already been performed. It may have been completed. Therefore, if it is confirmed that the game ball has been accepted in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 and then the effect of urging the player to stop right-handed hitting is started, the second and third game balls are launched. There is a high possibility that it will end up, and even if the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened, there is still a concern that it may return to the closed state immediately. Will be done.

According to such a third production example, for example, the normal symbol variation started immediately before the end of the second time saving state is executed in a form straddling the normal gaming state, and is a normal hit in the normal gaming state. When the symbol is stopped, a right-handed hit is performed in the normal game state, and when the first sensor detects the first game ball, an effect urging that the right-handed hit should be interrupted appears. The first game ball to be detected may be accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 opened by the opening pattern (second opening pattern of FIG. 193) adopted in the second time saving state. If the acceptance is made, the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 operates in the open state. At this time, if the right-handed hit can be completed by the stop of the second game ball (launch after 0.6 seconds) at most, the second start port (second non-second non) is in the open state. The electric start winning opening) 2004 will not immediately return to the closed state, and this can be maintained in the open state. Further, such an action effect can be expected to be exhibited even when the normal hit symbol is stopped due to the normal symbol fluctuation started in the normal game state (the above-mentioned rare event may occur). For).

In the above-mentioned production example, when the normal hit symbol is stopped in the normal game state, the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the closed state is operated in the open state. Changed to monitor whether the minimum required number of game balls were hit to the right. However, regardless of whether or not the normal hit symbol is stopped in the normal game state, it may be monitored at all times, or when it is monitored that the minimum required number of game balls have been hit to the right. , You may always start the production that encourages you to stop right-handed.

Further, in the first opening pattern to the third opening pattern illustrated in FIG. 193, when the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 operates, the opening that makes it easier for the game ball to actually enter the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. The number of states is one. However, the opening pattern is only an example, and for example, a plurality of opening states may be set. In such a case, when it is monitored that the minimum number of game balls required to be accepted into the normal electric winning opening 2011 has been hit to the right, the production should be completed within a predetermined time. It is desirable to return to the state where the effect that urges the strike to be interrupted does not appear. According to such a configuration, intermittent right-handed striking is promoted, so even if the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened, it immediately returns to the closed state. It becomes possible to obtain the opportunity to open the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 multiple times while suppressing the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, as an effect when it is monitored that the minimum number of game balls required for acceptance into the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is hit to the right, an image display appearing on the game board side effect display device 1600 or an image display It can be realized by outputting a specific warning sound. Further, as the image display, in addition to the one that directly displays that the right-handed striking should be interrupted, the one that displays that the steering wheel operation itself should be interrupted, the one that prompts the striking method other than the right-handed striking, and the like may be used. ..

In addition, since there is a concern that the appearance conditions of this third production example may overlap with those of the above-mentioned first production example, one of the first production example and the third production example is selected. It is desirable that one of the production examples is not adopted in the control program.

[18-2-4. Other productions]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194, the transition of the gaming state is complicated, and the receiving / receiving points to be targeted for entering the ball are also different in each gaming state. Therefore, in particular, there is a concern that those who have little experience in playing pachinko or those who are not accustomed to complicated playing (beginners, elderly people, etc.) cannot recognize how to play pachinko, which may reduce the interest in pachinko.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, light emitters (not shown) such as LEDs are provided in the vicinity of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, respectively. It is arranged. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the entrances (first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, second starting port) on the side where the game ball should basically be aimed at each of these light emitters. (2nd non-electric start winning opening) By controlling the light emission toward 2004, the player is not confused as to what to do with the progress procedure of the game.

However, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to the present embodiment, even as such a light emission control, a light emission mode that can add fun to the game and maintain a state advantageous to the player is adopted. It is said.

For example, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), in the second time saving state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is in the closed state, and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening). When the driven member of 2004 is in the open state, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004), the second starting opening (first) 2 It is possible to control the light emission only toward the non-electric start winning opening) 2004).

Then, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) that was opened in such a second time saving state remains in the open state, and the normal game state is changed from the second time saving state. When there is a transition to the (non-time saving state), as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is in the closed state in the normal gaming state. In addition, a situation occurs in which the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in an open state. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the situation shown in FIG. 198 (b) occurs, either the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) It is possible to control the light emission even if it is directed toward.

Then, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) that is in the open state in such a normal gaming state (non-time saving state) remains in the open state and is in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state). When there is a transition from the state) to the first time saving state, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is closed in the first time saving state. In addition, a situation occurs in which the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in an open state. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c) occurs, of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004). , It is possible to control the light emission only toward the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b.

According to such a configuration, first, in the situation shown in FIG. 198 (a), the ball should be put into an advantageous state in which the ball should be entered into the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) in the light emitting state. It is easy to recognize that there is something, and it is expected that the game will be maintained. In the situation shown in FIG. 198 (a), even after the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) is closed, if right-handed striking is continued, the open state is immediately restored. Therefore, as long as it is controlled to the second time saving state, the light emitting state with respect to the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) may be maintained.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 198 (a) is changed to the situation shown in FIG. 198 (b), the open state of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) is maintained. Despite this, no light is emitted toward either the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the second start It is beneficial for the player to keep the game ball in the open state without entering the game ball into the mouth (second non-electric start winning mouth) 2004. Therefore, according to such a configuration, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state in the normal gaming state, and it seems that it is clearly beneficial to hit right by appearance. Even if there is, it is easy to recognize that it is not in a state to hit right, and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened until the normal game state (non-time saving state) is completed. You will be able to encourage them to maintain their condition.

According to such a configuration, it becomes inconspicuous that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state, and the game is advanced by left-handed in such a situation. Become. In this respect, in the normal game state (non-time saving state, non-probability change state), it usually takes a relatively long time to obtain the big hit again, so it is possible to determine whether or not the big hit will be obtained in the normal game state. It can be expected that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, which is not in a conspicuous state, is gradually forgotten in the open state during the period of joy and melancholy.

Then, when it was forgotten that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 was in the open state, the situation shown in FIG. 198 (b) changed to the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c). Then, despite returning to the same time-saving state as shown in FIG. 198 (a) (a state in which the frequency of acceptance to the normal electric winning opening 2011 is high) and a probable change state (a state in which the jackpot probability is high). Light is emitted only toward the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b in the closed state, not toward the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state.

Here, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state only when the situation (first time saving state) shown in FIG. 198 (c) is controlled. It is extremely beneficial to the player (the second special symbol is controlled to a probabilistic state in which it is difficult to put the game ball into the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. As described above, it is the timing at which the same game value as when the player is in the most advantageous state can be enjoyed by performing the jackpot determination. And, as described above, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, and the gate portion 2003 are all right-handed games. It is provided on the same path through which the ball flows down.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, if the game ball is inserted into the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state, the situation becomes extremely beneficial to the player. Regardless of this, only the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b in the closed state is intentionally made to emit light, not the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state, and the first non-electric starting winning opening is made to emit light. I am trying to encourage right-handed hits aiming at 2002b. According to such a configuration, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is open without the player noticing that the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is open. ) The game ball will flow down toward 2004, and as a result, it will be possible to generate an extremely beneficial event for the player (a big hit judgment on the second special symbol side despite the first time saving state). With such a sense of surprise, it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball first reaches the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, and then when it is not accepted by the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the second starting port ( The second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is reached, and then when the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is not accepted, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b is reached. Then, when the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is not accepted, the gate portion 2003 is reached.

Therefore, when a right-handed strike aimed at the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b in the closed state is started, the game ball is not accepted by the gate portion 2003 and the normal electric winning opening 2011 is not opened, and the second Since the game ball will be accepted in the starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, it is possible to more preferably give a feeling of surprise. In the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c), even after the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004) is closed, the first non-first as long as it is controlled to the first time saving state. The light emitting state with respect to the electric start winning opening 2002b may be maintained. For example, in this first time saving state, even if a rare event occurs in which the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is once closed and then opened again. 1 Of the non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the second starting opening is controlled so as to emit light only toward the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b. If the (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is maintained in the extinguished state, such a feeling of surprise can be given again. However, when the second time saving state occurs after the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is opened again, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b and the second starting port (second starting port) Of the non-electric start winning openings (non-electric starting winning openings) 2004, controlling the light emission only toward the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning openings) 2004 is a game of how to proceed with the game. It is desirable to prevent people from being confused.

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), in the normal gaming state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. When all of the above are in the open state, the peripheral control MPU1511a does not emit light toward either the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. To control.

That is, in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a), it is beneficial for the player to keep the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state, but the first non-electric starting port. It is not necessary to maintain the open state of the electric start winning opening 2002b, but rather it can be said that it is more beneficial to play the ball so that the ball is entered with a high acceptance probability when in the normal gaming state. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b is a game ball that is not accepted by the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. It is provided in a receiving position. Therefore, when a game ball is launched aiming at the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the game ball is not the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b but the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. There is a concern that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 will be closed. Then, in the normal game state, the game value that is lost when the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 in the open state is closed is the first non-electric start winning in the open state. Since it is extremely larger than the game value obtained when the ball is entered into the mouth 2002b with a high acceptance probability, it is desirable not to perform such a risky game progress.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a), the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 Since the light is not emitted in any direction and the left-handed strike is urged instead of the right-handed strike, the open state of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is suitably maintained. You will be able to do it.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the first time saving state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. In the peripheral control MPU1511a, when both of the above are in the open state, the first non-electric start winning prize is not the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in which an extremely beneficial event occurs when the ball is entered. Light is emitted only toward the mouth 2002b.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) occurs, the same processing as in the case where the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c) occurs is performed. As a result, even when the situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) occurs, the player does not notice that the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state, and the first A game ball flows down toward the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, which is extremely beneficial to the player (a big hit judgment on the second special symbol side despite the first time saving state). Because it becomes possible to generate, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment by such a feeling of surprise.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (c), in the second time saving state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. When both of the above are in the open state, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the second starting port (second) of the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 Non-electric start winning opening) It is possible to control the light emission only toward 2004.

According to such a configuration, in the second time saving state, both the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 are in the open state. Even in the case of, the game ball will be launched aiming at the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 on the side where the big hit judgment is performed under favorable conditions for the player. Therefore, the player can appropriately enjoy the playability assumed when the player is in the second time saving state.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, both the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 are in an open state. Even if it is possible to enter the ball in any of the above, both the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 are simultaneously emitted. I try not to let him. Therefore, it becomes possible to enjoy a smooth game without causing anxiety about which receiving port in the open state should be aimed at.

[18-3. Opening of non-electric start winning opening in normal game state]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a non-electric start winning opening (first non-electric starting winning opening) through a normal hit game not only in the time saving state but also in the non-time saving state (normal game state). It has a technical feature that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004) can be opened in 2002b. By providing the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment with such technical features, it is possible to realize a characteristic configuration and effect not found in the conventional gaming machine. Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations and effects realized by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

[18-3-1. First feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side (first special lottery) and the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side (second special lottery), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, are performed. In the prepared gaming machine, even when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state, a gaming situation is provided in which the symbol variation of the second special symbol can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a gaming situation is provided. It is possible to maintain the execution of the symbol variation of the second special symbol until an arbitrary timing by the player (the first feature relating to the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state).

First, as illustrated in FIG. 114, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, apart from the gate portion 2003a for allowing a normal lottery to be performed when hitting right, the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 In the middle of the flow path that flows down toward the first start winning opening 2002a, a gate portion 2003b through which the game ball can pass is arranged. By arranging the gate portion 2003b in this way, the normal lottery can be performed even when the left-handed game recommended in the normal game state is performed. As described above with reference to FIG. 114, when the gate portion 2003 is arranged at a position where the game ball can pass whether it is hit right or left (that is, the game medium is gated in both the time-saving game state and the normal game state. If it can pass through), there may be one gate portion 2003 (the gate portions 2003a and 2003b do not have to be arranged separately).

Then, as illustrated in FIG. 191, in the normal lottery in the normal game state (non-time saving state), the winning probability of the normal hit is set lower than that in the time saving state, but when the normal hit is won, the normal hit is won. Of a plurality of open patterns (first open pattern to third open pattern) including the same open pattern (first open pattern, second open pattern) as in normal hit in a time-saving state, based on the type of hit symbol. Since the operation pattern of the opening operation of the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is selected from the above, it is realistic to make the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 win a game ball in the ordinary hit game accompanying the ordinary hit in the normal game state. Is made possible.

Further, as described above for the internal configuration of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the path of the game ball entering the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is routed by the distribution member 2011b in the first passage 2011d, the second By allocating to either the passage 2011e or the third passage 2011c, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened when passing through the first passage 2011d, and the second passage 2011e is passed when passing through the second passage 2011e. 2 The non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened (see FIGS. 115 and 116). Here, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 have a structure in which the open state is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are inserted after the open state. For each non-electric start winning opening in the open state, it is possible to easily enter (win) a game ball by hitting right, which is different from the main game method (left hit) in the normal game state. it can.

That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball can be won in the normal electric prize 2011 even in the normal game state, and further, the second open pattern for guiding the game ball to the second passage 2011e. When is selected (in other words, when the hit symbol 3 is a normal hit), the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened as the game ball flows down, so that the normal game state is obtained. A game situation is provided in which the symbol variation of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the symbol variation of the first special symbol, which is the main game of the game, can be executed. Then, as described above, once the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened, the player strikes right at his / her favorite timing to enter the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004. By entering the ball, the number of times of the predetermined number (2 in this example) conditioned until the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 shifts to the closed state, the symbol change of the second special symbol (second special lottery) ) Can be executed.

Here, in the conventional game machine (for example, the game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1), a normal game is provided by providing a second starting port capable of adjusting whether or not the game medium can be inserted by providing an opening / closing means. It was possible to open the second starting port even in the state, but if the game medium cannot be inserted within the predetermined opening time, the second starting port will be closed and the second starting port will be closed. The special lottery (second special lottery in the present embodiment) due to the entry of the ball into the starting port could not be received. As a result, in the conventional game machine, there is a risk that the given chance will be missed and the player's interest will be greatly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is operated in an open state in which the game ball can be easily entered in the normal game state. However, after the open state is reached, the closed state does not occur with the passage of time, and the open state can be maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are entered (winning). Thus, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can prevent the player from missing a chance (an opportunity to win the second special lottery), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to the loss of the chance. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can freely select the timing for winning the game ball with respect to the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 which is in the open state in the normal game state. Since it is possible, it is possible to play a game in which the privilege (payment of prize balls and execution of the second special lottery) due to the winning is surely obtained. Specifically, for example, when the number of reserved symbol changes of the special symbol has reached the upper limit (for example, 4) or is close to the upper limit (for example, 3), a prize is given to the non-electric start winning opening. However, there is a possibility that the number of reservations will overflow and the special lottery based on the prize will not be executed. In such a game situation, the above-mentioned privilege can be surely obtained by selecting to maintain the open state without hitting right.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 115, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 2002a is displayed on the game board side as a fixed first starting opening that is always open and the ball entry rate does not fluctuate. The second non-electric start winning opening 2004, which is arranged directly under the device 1600 and has a variable ball entry rate, is arranged at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600. That is, while the first start winning opening 2002a is arranged at a position where a ball can be entered when a left-handed hit is made, the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 is placed at a position where a right-handed hit is not made. It will be arranged in a position where there is almost no possibility of. By having such an arrangement relationship, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the left-handed game is performed when the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is maintained in the open state in the normal game state. Even so, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down toward the first starting winning opening 2002a from entering the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004, and the player is in the open state of the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004. It is possible to prevent the game from ending at an undesired timing (entering a ball and shifting to a closed state). In other words, it contributes to allowing the player to arbitrarily select the timing at which the game ball is inserted into the second non-electric start winning opening 2004.

Further, according to the configuration illustrated in FIG. 115, since the big winning opening 2005 is arranged at the lower part on the right side of the center of the game board 5, in the big hit game state where the big winning opening 2005 is open. Right-handed games are recommended (right-handed games can easily win a prize). Then, according to FIG. 115, the non-electric start winning openings (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) are all right-handed when they are in the open state, so that the game ball is played. Is arranged at a position to receive. Therefore, by having such an arrangement relationship, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the non-electric start winning opening (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) is opened. If the jackpot game is executed while the game is set to, the jackpot game is performed by hitting the right side, so that the game ball also enters the non-electric start winning opening and the closed state is entered.

That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the configuration as shown in FIG. 115, the open state of the non-electric start winning opening can be maintained until an arbitrary timing in the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the open state from being maintained until after the end of the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 1, there is a possibility that the gaming state may be changed before and after the jackpot game (for example, the transition from the normal gaming state to the probabilistic state), but by performing the above-mentioned maintenance and suppression of the open state, it is not possible. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience caused by maintaining the open state of the electric start winning opening across the change of the gaming state. Suppressing the maintenance of the open state of the non-electric start winning opening across the change of the game state in this way causes a game that is more advantageous than the game originally assumed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example,). Contributes to the prevention of (for example, executing the second special lottery in the first time saving state). Furthermore, it can also contribute to the prevention that an unauthorized operation is performed on the non-electric start winning opening (particularly the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) and the unexpected advantageous game as described above is executed. ..

As a gaming machine that makes it possible to realize the first feature relating to the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the configuration and control described in the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to the above, and the configuration as described below may be provided, or the control as described below may be performed.

For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine capable of realizing the first feature is the first starting winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, as illustrated in FIGS. 114 to 116. 2 The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the non-electric start winning openings 2004 are arranged, and the internal structure of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 also has a plurality of operation trigger areas (first operation trigger area, second operation trigger area). , Outlier area) is not limited to the configuration provided. Specifically, at least the first start winning opening 2002a and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 need be arranged, and the internal configuration of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 also includes at least the second operation trigger area. It suffices if the second passage 2011e to have is provided. Even with such a minimum configuration, the game ball can enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 and pass through the second operation trigger area from the second passage 2011e at the time of normal hit in the normal game state. If the control is performed, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened even in the normal gaming state, and the open state is maintained until a predetermined number of gaming balls are entered (winning). Can be made to.

The same applies to the other features (second to fourth features) described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the first feature, the non-electric machine corresponding to the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 A plurality of starting winning openings may be arranged. In such a case, by providing the operation trigger area corresponding to each second non-electric start winning opening inside the normal electric winning opening 2011, the second non-electric start winning prize corresponding to the operation trigger area through which the game ball has passed is provided. The mouth can be open. In addition, the number of winning games allowed before the transition from the open state to the closed state is different for each of the plurality of second non-electric starting winning openings, and the number of winning balls at the time of winning is different. You may. When these configurations are adopted, it becomes possible to provide an opportunity to execute the second special lottery with more complicated game characteristics.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 may be set as a condition for shifting the entry of a plurality of (for example, two) game balls from the open state to the closed state. Good. In such a case, when the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened in the normal game state, there are multiple opportunities to receive the second special lottery, which is more advantageous than the normal first special lottery. Since it is provided to the player over a period of time, it is possible to increase the chances of expecting a larger profit than usual (a big hit by the second special lottery). Further, such a plurality of profit acquisition opportunities are not provided only within a predetermined time lapse, but can be obtained at a timing preferred by the player across a plurality of games. The width can be greatly expanded. More specifically, even if a game ball is inserted once by hitting the right side of the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 that has been opened, one ball is still left. The player can arbitrarily select when to execute the two second special lottery.

Further, for example, in FIG. 191, the opening patterns (first opening pattern, second opening pattern) of the movable member 2011a which are partially common in the time saving state and the non-time saving state are adopted, but the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is adopted. Then, the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 may be different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state. Specifically, for example, in the case of a time-saving state, a long-time opening mode (long-opening mode) in which the game ball can be received extremely easily is selected, while in the non-time-saving state, the long-opening mode is selected. An opening mode (short opening mode) with an opening time shorter than that of the mode may be selected. However, even if the short opening mode is selected in the normal game state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the normal electric winning opening 2011 at a rate exceeding at least a certain degree, and the entered game ball is It is required to have the possibility of passing through the second passage 2011e. In this way, by giving variety to the opening patterns of the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the effect of enhancing the playability of the ordinary hit game can be expected.

Further, for example, in FIG. 114, the non-electric start winning openings (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) are left and right that control acceptance of a game ball by opening and closing a movable member left and right. Although it has a structure having an opening / closing type opening / closing means, the non-electric start winning opening in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a tongue type that controls acceptance of a game ball by opening / closing to the front side of the game board 5. The structure may have a means for opening and closing. That is, when the tongue-type opening / closing means is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down from above or from the side is accepted, while when the tongue-type opening / closing means is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow down. For example, a flow path to the grand prize opening 2005 is formed. In such a case, since the left / right opening / closing means is not required, the area required for arranging the non-electric start winning opening on the game board 5 can be reduced. Further, when the non-electric start winning opening is arranged in the middle of the flow path to the big winning opening 2005, the big hit game is executed even when the big hit game is started with the non-electric starting winning opening open. It can be securely closed inside.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the same as the effect of notifying that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state in the time saving state (for example, the light emission control illustrated in FIGS. 198 and 199). In the normal gaming state, an effect of notifying that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state may be executed. That is, when the non-electric start winning opening (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) is in the open state, it is open until the non-electric starting winning opening is closed. A specific effect may be performed to notify the player that the player is in a state. As the display means for performing the specific effect, a game board side effect display device 1600, an LED or a lamp provided at a position visible to the player, or the like can be considered.

In addition to notifying that the non-electric start winning opening is open, the production content of the above-mentioned specific effect is that a game ball can be inserted into the open non-electric starting winning opening at any time (digestible). (There is), or to display which non-electric start winning opening is open in a mode that can be specified (specifically, for example, the screen display of the game board side effect display device 1600). (For example, displaying a message such as "The second starting port is open" or "Please let me enter the ball when you like"), and even if you display each of these effects in combination as appropriate. Good. However, when executing such an effect, it is preferable not to give a teaching that induces a disadvantage of the player. Further, when the game ball enters the open non-electric start winning opening and shifts to the closed state, the effect related to the shift may be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the open / closed state of the non-electric start winning opening is detected by a sensor or the like and sent to the main control board 1310, but further, when the specific effect is to be executed. The main control board 1310 may also notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the open / closed state of the non-electric start winning opening. In this way, not only the main control board 1310 but also the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes the open / closed state of the non-electric start winning opening, so that various effects can be executed according to the game situation, and the player can perform various effects. It is also possible to teach useful information in more detail by the production. Specifically, for example, when the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state in the normal game state and it is recognized in advance that the normal hit will be derived in the normal lottery, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the result of the normal hit. Before the game is released, the non-electric start winning opening in the open state is instructed to win a game ball (pre-digestion). Further, for example, when it is recognized in advance that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is in the open state in the normal game state and the symbol fluctuation of the first special symbol whose execution is suspended is a big hit, the peripheral control board The 1510 causes the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 to execute an effect of teaching not to win a game ball until the jackpot is confirmed. By doing so, when it is stipulated that the second-side symbol variation is executed in preference to the first-side symbol variation, a useless second before the jackpot due to the first-side symbol variation is derived. 2 It is possible to avoid the disadvantage of having a special lottery.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the conditions for shifting the winning (winning) of a plurality of game balls from the open state to the closed state of the non-electric starting winning opening (particularly the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004). In this case, different display contents may be produced according to the number of game balls winning in the non-electric start winning opening in the open state. By doing so, not only is it notified that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state by the specific effect described in the previous paragraph, but also what the current winning state is and how many remaining prizes are won. It is possible to additionally teach the player whether or not the opportunity is left, and it is possible to assist the player in selecting the ball entry timing. Specifically, for example, while it is displayed that two winning opportunities remain until the game is closed in the normal game state, the degree of winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 2002a has decreased. At that time (when the number of holdings is low), if the player wants to avoid the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol from stopping, for the time being, hit only one game ball to the right and the non-electric start winning opening. You will be able to select a game strategy, such as letting you win a prize once and letting you see the situation while leaving one time.

[18-3-2. Second feature]
The second feature of opening the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state, which is realized by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described. In the following (second to fourth features), detailed description of the technical matters for which the detailed reason has been explained in the first feature will be omitted in order to avoid repetition.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side (first special lottery) and the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side (second special lottery), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, are performed. In the prepared gaming machine, even when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state, when the predetermined starting conditions for the normal lottery are satisfied, the game ball is opened by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011. Provides an advantageous opening operation (specifically, a second opening pattern for special 2 route distribution) that provides an open state in which the machine can easily pass through a predetermined operating area, and an open state in which it is difficult to pass through the predetermined operating area. It is possible to execute the disadvantageous opening operation (specifically, the third opening pattern of the off-route distribution) at a predetermined ratio (the second feature relating to the opening of the non-electric starting winning opening in the normal gaming state). ..

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even in the normal gaming state, a normal lottery (at a low probability) is performed when the gaming ball is left-struck and passes through the gate portion 2003b (see FIG. 114). Then, as illustrated in FIG. 191, the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is based on the type of the winning symbol (the symbol that stops the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol) when the normal hit is 1/99. It is determined. More specifically, the second open pattern (corresponding to the above-mentioned advantageous opening operation) is selected in the case of the hit symbol 3 which corresponds to 20% of the normal hit, and the third open pattern in the case of the hit symbol 2 which corresponds to 40% of the normal hit. The pattern (the above-mentioned disadvantageous opening operation) is selected. That is, in the example of FIG. 191 in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal lottery in the normal game state is performed, the advantageous opening operation and the disadvantage opening operation are executed at a predetermined ratio (20% and 40% of the normal hit time). Will be.

Then, when the advantageous opening operation is executed, the game ball that has entered the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is easily guided to pass through the second passage 2011e and the second operation trigger region, so that the second operation is performed. The non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened. This series of flow and its effect have already been explained in the first feature.

Here, in a conventional game machine (for example, a game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1), when a hit is obtained by a normal lottery in a normal game state, a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of second start ports. Is open until a prize is won, and the second special lottery can be executed when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port during the open state. However, in such a conventional game machine, since it is a simple game in which the second starting port is opened when a normal game is won in the normal game state, there is a place that is not interesting, and the game is interesting. There was a problem that it was difficult to expect the improvement of. That is, there is a considerable possibility that the player will not be able to fully enjoy the game simply by inserting the game ball into the second starting port when the hit is normal.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, by the time the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened in the normal gaming state, a normal lottery is won. Not only that, in the ordinary hit game accompanying the winning, it is a necessary condition that the game ball passes through a specific route beyond the distribution of a plurality of routes provided inside the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the opening of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) can be finally obtained by clearing the process of a plurality of stages, so that the complicated game property can be achieved. It can be expected that the delicate gameplay will enhance the interest of the game. In particular, since the above-mentioned plurality of routes include “off” routes, in some cases, any starting port (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) may be opened. There are cases where it cannot be done. On the contrary, the existence of such a disadvantageous case can attract the player's interest in the traveling path of the game ball, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, in addition to the second opening pattern corresponding to the advantageous opening operation and the third opening pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous opening operation, the opening having an advantageous degree between the two. As an operation, the first open pattern (special 1 route distribution) can also be executed at a predetermined ratio (40% per normal rate) (see FIG. 191). In this way, depending on the progress path of the game ball that entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 when it became a normal hit, the benefits to be given can be further diversified, so that the game can be delicately played. It can be expected to have the effect of enhancing the interest of games.

As a gaming machine that makes it possible to realize the second feature relating to the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the configuration and control described in the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to the above, and the configuration as described below may be provided, or the control as described below may be performed.

For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine capable of realizing the second feature is the first starting winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, as illustrated in FIGS. 114 to 116. 2 The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the non-electric start winning openings 2004 are arranged, and the internal structure of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 also has a plurality of operation trigger areas (first operation trigger area, second operation trigger area). , Outlier area) is not limited to the configuration provided. Specifically, at least the first starting winning opening 2002a and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are arranged, and as an internal configuration of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, a second passage 2011e having a second operation trigger region is provided. A third passage 2011c having an outlier region may be provided. Even with such a minimum configuration, when a predetermined start condition for the normal lottery is satisfied (passing the game ball of the gate portion 2003b) in the normal game state, the opening operation by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 If the advantageous opening operation (the second opening pattern of the special 2 route distribution) and the disadvantageous opening operation (the third opening pattern of the off-route distribution) are controlled to be executed at a predetermined ratio, the above second Features can be realized.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an effect (first effect) of promoting entry into a predetermined ball entry port (specifically, a normal electric winning opening 2011) and a predetermined ball entry port. An effect based on whether or not a game ball has entered the ball (second effect) and an effect based on which operation trigger area the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry port has passed (third effect). It may be provided with a control means for executing the above. It should be noted that these effects may be executed by the screen display of the game board side effect display device 1600, or may be executed by the light emission of a predetermined accessory arranged on the game board 5. May be good. Specifically, for example, in the third effect, the passage having the operation trigger region through which the game ball has passed (any of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c) may be made to emit light. Further, in the third production, when the non-electric start winning opening (for example, the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) is opened based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the operation trigger area, the non-electric starting winning opening is concerned. The mouth may be made to emit light.

By executing the first to third effects in this way, when a normal hit occurs in the normal game state, the player is forced to hit right and is encouraged to enter the normal electric winning opening 2011. Since different effects are executed depending on the flow path of the game ball that has entered, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the game ball.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a passage detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed a predetermined operation trigger area, and a pachinko machine 1 that has not passed the predetermined operation trigger area (or another predetermined area). It may be provided with a non-passage detecting means for detecting the passing). Specifically, for example, the passage detecting means corresponds to the sensor 2011i (see FIG. 115) that detects the passage of the game ball in the second operation trigger region (may be replaced with the second passage 2011e), and the non-passing detecting means. Corresponds to the sensor 2011g that detects the passage of the game ball in the outlier region (which may be replaced by the third passage 2011c). Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the third effect can be executed and the content of the third effect based on the detection results of the passage detecting means and the non-passing detecting means.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described when the distribution of the game ball in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is explained with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116 (see [5]), it is normal. By forming the front surface of the electric winning opening 2011 (at least the front surface from the distribution member 2011b to the entrance of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c) with a visible material, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 The flow path of the game ball inside can be made visible to the player. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize which operation trigger area (or whether or not the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 2011) passes through (or whether or not it passes through a specific operation trigger area). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to the movement of the game ball.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rolling speed of the game ball before the game ball entered into the normal electric start winning opening 2011 passes through a predetermined operation trigger area (for example, the second operation trigger area). A deceleration means for reducing the speed can be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), looking at the flow path of the game ball that has entered the normal electric start port 2011, the game ball enters the distribution member 2011b before passing through the second passage 2011e. Since they come into contact with each other, the rolling speed is reduced. In this way, by reducing the rolling speed of the game ball inside the ordinary electric start port 2011, the movement of the game ball can be shown carefully, and the player's interest in which operation trigger area to pass through can be determined. Can be expected to have the effect of further enhancing.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above in the first feature, it is related to the open state of the non-electric start winning opening (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting winning opening 2004). Then, various effects such as notifying the player that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state can be executed. However, when a predetermined game situation is in progress (during a special symbol hit fluctuation, during a big hit game, etc.), the execution of such an effect may be restricted.

Here, the predetermined gaming situation in which the execution of the effect related to the open state of the non-electric start winning opening should be restricted is that the player is confused or disadvantaged by executing the effect. It is a game situation that may be played. Specifically, for example, even if it is taught that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state during the big hit game, it does not give a special benefit to the player, and the benefit that the player can obtain by the teaching is unknown. This may confuse the player. In the first place, even if the non-electric start winning opening is open, it is inevitable that the game ball will win the non-electric starting winning opening by the end of the big hit game due to the digestion of the big hit game. In addition, for example, when the hit fluctuation of the special symbol is being executed, the latest big hit is confirmed when the effect of inserting the game ball into the non-electric start winning opening in the open state is displayed. Therefore, there is no effect of the effect, and it may be disadvantageous for the player as much as the launch of the game ball is prompted. In this way, by preventing the player from executing a predetermined effect in a game situation that can induce a disadvantage to the player, the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind and suppress a decrease in the motivation to play. it can.

[18-3-3. Third feature]
The third feature of opening the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state, which is realized by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot determination on the first special symbol side (first special lottery) and a jackpot determination on the second special symbol side (second special lottery), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol. The gaming machine is provided with a first operation trigger area (may be replaced with the first passage 2011d) and a first non-electric start winning opening 2002b as a mechanism related to the first side symbol change, and the first side symbol change at the time of a big hit. A normal game is provided with a second operation trigger area (which may be replaced with the second passage 2011e) and a second non-electric start winning opening 2004 as a mechanism related to the second side symbol variation that gives a greater profit to the player. Even when the state is controlled, when a normal hit is obtained by a normal lottery, the game ball easily determines the first operation trigger area for the opening operation by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011. A first advantageous opening operation (first opening pattern) that provides a passable open state and a second advantageous opening operation (second opening) that provides an open state in which the gaming ball can easily pass through the second operation trigger region. It is possible to control to execute the opening operation by any of a plurality of operation patterns including at least (pattern) (third feature related to opening the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state). ..

As illustrated in FIG. 115, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a first passage 2011d having a first operation trigger region and a second passage 2011e having a second operation trigger region inside the ordinary electric start port 2011. Is provided, and the distribution member 2011b operates in a fixed operation pattern, while the opening operation of the movable member 2011a is selected from a plurality of operation patterns to determine which operation trigger region the game ball passes through. It is controlled. More specifically, according to the example of FIG. 191, in the normal game state, when the hit symbol 1 is a normal hit, the game ball is easily guided to the first operation trigger region (first passage 2011d). When the possible first opening pattern (special 1 route distribution) is executed and the hit symbol 3 is a normal hit, the game ball can be easily guided to the second operation trigger area (second passage 2011e). The second open pattern (special 2 route distribution) is executed. In any of the distributions, the profit of paying out the prize ball is given to the normal electric start opening 2011 when the game ball wins, but the non-electric start winning opening is opened after passing through each operation trigger area. However, since the starting port on the first special symbol side and the starting port on the second special symbol side are different, the profit given to the player is larger in the special 2 route distribution.

Here, in the conventional game machine (for example, the game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1), the second starting port is configured to be opened when a hit is obtained by a normal lottery in a normal game state. However, this was a monotonous one in which the predetermined second starting port was opened after the normal symbol was won. Therefore, in the case of such a conventional game machine, although the player is given an advantageous chance of determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the player's interest diminishes as the game is repeated due to its monotony. There was a considerable risk that it would end up.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, when a hit is obtained by a normal lottery in a normal game state, the movable member 2011a is opened to open the normal electric winning opening 2011. Not only is it possible to easily enter the game ball, but also one of the multiple types of starting ports with different profit levels can be opened by the distribution inside the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, so that the final of the ordinary hit game Up to the stage, you can expect and entertain which benefits will be granted. Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine that can maintain the interest of the player even if the number of games is increased.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the degree of profit is different, when a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings are arranged, all the non-electric starting winning openings are maintained in an open state. Assuming that, the number of times the player can arbitrarily enter the ball (the number of times the special lottery is executed) can be increased as compared with the case where the number of non-electrically started winning openings is one. For example, if the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are maintained in an open state until two game balls are entered, the first special lottery is performed twice and the second special lottery is performed. You can stock the opportunity to receive a total of four special lottery, two special lottery. By arranging a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings in this way, it can be expected that the opening of the non-electric starting winning openings will increase the degree of influence on the entire game progress and strengthen the player's interest in the opening. ..

As described in the present embodiment, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are different in the type of special lottery executed based on the winning ball, so that the player The degree of advantage of profit is different, but in addition to this, the degree of advantage of profit may be different as follows. That is, for example, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is defined to shift to the closed state when one game ball enters (wins) in the open state, while the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 is open. The predetermined number of winnings regarding the end of the open state may be changed, such as stipulating that the state does not shift to the closed state until two game balls are entered (winning) in the state. Further, for example, the number of prize balls associated with the winning of the game ball to the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b is set to one, while the number of winning balls associated with the winning of the game ball to the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 is set to one. The number of prize balls may be changed, such as three. The method of differentiating the degree of advantage of the profit given in this way is not limited to different types of starting ports, and a plurality of starting ports of the same type (for example, a plurality of second non-electric starting winning prizes). It can also be applied (when providing a mouth).

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 115, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 2002a is arranged directly under the game board side effect display device 1600, and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b 2 By arranging the non-electric start winning opening 2004 at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the first starting winning opening 2002a in the normal game state, the game It is difficult for the ball to reach the vicinity of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004. That is, even if the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 is in the open state, a game ball launched by left-handed aiming at the first starting winning opening 2002a enters the ball. It has a configuration that suppresses storage, and by providing such a configuration, it is put into an open state through the first advantageous opening operation (first opening pattern) or the second advantageous opening operation (second opening pattern). It assists the player to enter (win) a game ball at any time for the non-electric start winning opening.

As a gaming machine that makes it possible to realize the third feature relating to the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the configuration and control described in the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to the above, and the configuration as described below may be provided, or the control as described below may be performed.

For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine capable of realizing the third feature is the first starting winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, as illustrated in FIGS. 114 to 116. 2 Limited to a configuration in which the non-electric start winning opening 2004 is arranged and the internal structure of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is provided with a plurality of operation trigger areas (first actuation trigger area, second actuation trigger area, outlier region). Not done. Specifically, at least the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are arranged, and as an internal configuration of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, a first passage having a first operation trigger region is provided. It suffices if 2011d and the second passage 2011e having the second operation trigger region are provided. Even with such a minimum configuration, when a normal hit occurs in a normal game state, the degree of profit is higher for the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a than in a game aimed at the normal first start winning opening 2002a. Control to select and execute any one of a plurality of operation patterns including the first advantageous opening operation and the second advantageous opening operation having a higher profit degree than the first advantageous opening operation. (See, for example, FIG. 191), the third feature can be realized.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of non-electric start winning openings having different profit degrees in the open state, and a predetermined condition is provided in a state where one of the non-electric starting winning openings is open. When is satisfied, the other non-electric start winning opening may be overlapped and opened. Explaining with a specific example, after the normal hit of the hit symbol 1 occurs in the normal game state (the first open pattern is selected) and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened, the open state is changed. While being maintained, when a left-handed game is performed and a normal hit of the hit symbol 3 occurs (the second open pattern is selected), the game ball that has entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 triggers the second operation. Since it passes through the area, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened. As a result, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 can be overlapped and opened. It should be noted that such a superposed open state can be maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the respective non-electric start winning openings.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of non-electric start winning openings having different profit degrees in the open state, the opening and closing of each non-electric starting winning opening is performed independently. As a result, there are multiple non-electric starting machines with different profit degrees, such as a state in which only the non-electric start winning opening with a relatively small profit remains open and a state in which only the non-electric starting winning opening with a relatively large profit remains open. It is possible to create a state in which the winning openings are superimposed and remain open, which can be expected to entertain the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings having different profit degrees in the open state are provided, even if each of the non-electric starting winning openings has differently shaped opening / closing means. Good. Specifically, if one has left and right opening / closing means (see FIG. 199 and the like), the other may have tongue-type opening / closing means (not shown). When the shape of the opening / closing means is changed in this way, the player can easily distinguish a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings having different profit degrees in the open state (improvement of distinctiveness). Further, by disposing the winning openings having different shapes, it is possible to change the image held by the player for each winning opening, and it can be expected that the decorativeness of the game board 5 will be enhanced.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in the first and second features, the non-electric start winning opening (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) In relation to the open state, it is possible to perform various effects such as notifying the player which non-electric start winning opening is in the open state in the normal gaming state. These effects may be made to clearly indicate the content of the notification by the screen display of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, or may be another realization method (for example, it is suggested by emitting light from the winning opening in the open state). You may.

As an effect related to such a non-electric start winning opening, further, when the above-mentioned "state in which a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings are overlapped and remains open" occurs, "double opening" is clearly indicated. You may want to perform such a special effect. Specifically, for example, in the case of "single opening" in which one of the non-electric starting winning openings is in the open state, an effect of blinking the non-electric starting winning opening (or its surroundings) in the open state is performed. When "double opening" occurs, both non-electric starting winning openings (or their surroundings) are made to emit light in a more conspicuous manner than when "single opening" occurs. As a light emitting mode that is more conspicuous than when the single is opened, it is conceivable that the light is blinked in a shorter cycle, the light is emitted with a stronger luminous intensity, or the light is emitted in a different color. By executing such a special effect, the player can recognize that the game situation is rare, so that it feels like a higher profit can be obtained. It can be expected to enhance the interest of games.

As for the effect related to the non-electric start winning opening, as described in the second feature, there is a risk that the player may be confused or disadvantaged by executing the effect. When a certain "predetermined game situation" is in progress (during a hit fluctuation of a special symbol, during a big hit game, etc.), the execution of such an effect may be restricted.

Further, in the minimum configuration described above with respect to the third feature, as the internal configuration of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the first passage 2011d having the first operation trigger area and the second passage 2011e having the second operation trigger area are included. It would be good if it was provided, but in order to create further game play, any non-electric start winning opening will operate even if the game ball passes through the path distributed inside the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. A route that does not trigger (that is, an off-route) may be provided. With such a configuration, as illustrated in FIGS. 115 and 116, even if a game ball enters the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, if the off-route (for example, FIG. 116 (C)) flows down, , The first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are not opened, and only the prize balls associated with the winning of the ordinary electric starting winning opening 2011 are paid out. Then, the distribution control in which the game ball is guided to such an off-route can be realized by the operation (third open pattern) when the hit symbol 2 normally hits (see FIG. 193).

[18-3-4. Fourth feature]
A fourth feature of opening the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state, which is realized by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side (first special lottery) and the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side (second special lottery), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, are performed. The prepared gaming machine is provided with a first operation trigger area (may be replaced with the first passage 2011d) and a first non-electric start winning opening 2002b as a mechanism related to the first side symbol fluctuation, and is provided on the first side at the time of a big hit. A second operation trigger area (which may be replaced with the second passage 2011e) and a second non-electric start winning opening 2004 are provided as a mechanism related to the second side symbol variation that gives the player a profit larger than the symbol variation. When a normal winning result is obtained by a normal lottery in a normal game state, a game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 2011 and passes through one of the operation trigger areas (first actuation trigger area or second actuation trigger area). Before this, a suggestion effect (pre-suggestion effect in the open state) that suggests in advance which variable start port (first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or second non-electric start winning opening 2004) can be in the open state is performed. It can be executed (fourth feature relating to the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the control related to the normal symbol is performed as illustrated in FIG. 191, in the normal game state, based on the type of the normal hit result (the symbol type of the winning symbol) by the normal lottery. , The opening pattern of the movable member 2011a is determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 193, depending on which opening pattern is executed, the actuating trigger area (first actuating trigger area, second actuating trigger area) through which the game ball that has entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 passes. Is controlled. Therefore, the main control board 1310 that executes the normal lottery actually starts the normal hit game and determines which non-electric start winning opening is led to the open state based on the type of the normal hit result. It is possible to make a pre-judgment at the stage before the game ball enters the mouth 2011. Then, based on the result of such a preliminary judgment, the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 or the like can execute the "open state prior suggestion effect" that suggests the winning opening that is expected to be in the open state. it can.

FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining a prior suggestion effect in an open state. In FIG. 200, as an example of the “preliminary suggestion effect of the open state” in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, before the normal hit game is started in the normal game state and the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 2011. An effect suggesting that the situation in which the second non-electric starting port 2004 is being opened is approaching is shown in the order of passage of time. It is assumed that the prior suggestion effect shown in FIG. 200 is executed on the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the result of the above-mentioned "preliminary determination" from the main control board 1310 , Control this display screen.

First, in FIG. 200 (A), while the normal symbol is changing in the normal game state (the state of the normal figure display is not shown), "Opening chance!" Is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and the advance suggestion effect is started. In addition, since the symbol variation of the special symbol can be executed even during the execution of the advance suggestion effect, in the case of FIG. 200 (A), the symbol variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in a smaller display range than usual in the upper right part. There is. The display of the symbol variation of such a decorative symbol is continued until FIG. 200 (D) at which the prior suggestion effect ends.

At the time of display in FIG. 200 (A), since the game is in the normal game state, the game is played by left-handed. Therefore, in preparation for a future opening timing (FIG. 200 (D)), the character string "ready to hit right" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen. Further, the number "7" displayed in the center left of the display screen means that the remaining time of the countdown until the opening timing is 7 seconds. Here, as illustrated in FIG. 191, it is assumed that the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal game state is 10 seconds, and the normal hit in the hit symbol 3 can be derived by the symbol fluctuation of the normal symbol currently changing. It is assumed that it has been decided. That is, FIG. 200 (A) is displayed approximately 3 seconds after the start of the symbol variation of the normal symbol from which the normal hit by the hit symbol 3 is derived.

Further, in FIG. 200 (A), a model diagram of the game board 5 is shown in the right center portion of the display screen, and among them, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, and The area where the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is arranged is highlighted (indicated by the broken line in the figure), suggesting that something will happen in that area. However, at this stage, it is not specified which non-electric start winning opening will be open, so that the player can have a sense of expectation.

Next, in FIG. 200 (B), the remaining time of the countdown is reduced to "5 seconds". At this stage, in the model diagram of the game board 5 shown in the right center portion of the display screen, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is highlighted by being surrounded by a broken line. That is, it is suggested in advance that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 may be opened at this opening chance.

After that, the time elapses, and in FIG. 200 (C), the remaining time of the countdown becomes "1 second", and in FIG. 200 (D), the remaining time of the countdown is 0 seconds, that is, the normal hit by the hit symbol 3 is determined. .. In FIG. 200 (D), an image instructing to hit the game ball to the right is displayed in the model diagram of the game board 5, and a character string "Right hit!" Is displayed at the bottom of the display screen. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to hit right toward the ordinary electric winning opening 2011.

In addition, although the player is switched to right-handed at the display stage of FIG. 200 (D), when the normal hit game is started at the same time as the display timing of FIG. 200 (D), the movable member of the normal electric winning opening 2011 The game ball may not reach at the start of the opening operation of 2011a. Therefore, by setting an appropriate delay time between the display timing of FIG. 200 (D) and the start timing of the normal hit game, the right-handed game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 2011 in a timely manner. It can be made to ball. In terms of internal control, it is preferable that the peripheral control board 1510 adjusts the display timing of the screens shown in FIGS. 200 (A) to 200 (D) so as to allow a margin for the set delay time. ..

Then, by right-handing according to the display screen of FIG. 200 (D), the game ball is easily received in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 in which the movable member 2011a opens in the second opening pattern, and the distribution member 2011b By the flow path distribution according to the above, the game ball passes through the second passage 2011e (may be read as passing through the second operation trigger region), so that the second non-electric start winning opening is opened. That is, the game situation is realized according to the content of the suggestion by the pre-suggestion effect.

After that, when the normal hit game is completed, the normal effect screen in the normal game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 200 (E). If the display period shown in FIG. 200 (D) is made too long, the game ball will enter the open second non-electric starting winning opening before returning to left-handed in FIG. 200 (E). Since there is a risk, FIG. 200 (D) should be switched at an appropriate time, or FIG. 200 (D) should be switched when the number of game balls winning in the normal electric winning opening 2011 reaches a predetermined number. It may be.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment realizes the fourth feature by the peripheral control board 1510 receiving predetermined information from the main control board 1310 executing the advance suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 200. be able to. The pre-suggestion effect does not necessarily have to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the main control board 1310 may control it), or even if it is not displayed by the game board side effect display device 1600. Good (for example, other display monitors and indicators).

As a result of playing the game according to the suggestion of the prior suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 200 (A) to 200 (D), the game situation according to the suggestion content by the prior suggestion effect (for example, the second non-electric start winning opening). 2004 will be in the open state) can be realized. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in such a case, the same “non-electric start winning opening (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric starting” as described in the first to third features The effect related to the open state of the winning opening 2004) may be executed following the effect screen shown in FIG. 200 (D). Specifically, for example, it is conceivable to display a message such as "The second starting port has been opened. Please let the ball enter at any time."

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of prior suggestion effects as illustrated in FIG. 200 are prepared, and among these plurality of types of prior suggestion effects, based on the type of hit symbol per ordinary hit. The effect to be executed may be determined, and the determined effect may be executed during the symbol variation of the normal symbol. Specifically, the effect screen shown in FIG. 200 was a pre-suggestion effect when the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 was opened, but similarly, when the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b was opened. It is sufficient to prepare the advance suggestion production of.

Further, even when an off-route is prepared and a normal hit in which the off-route is selected is won (hit symbol 2 in FIG. 191), some suggestive effect may be performed. For example, a pre-suggestion effect by a countdown may be displayed together with a character string such as "Open chance?". However, since none of the non-electric start winning openings will be in the open state in the end, the "identification of the open state" as specified in the model diagram of the game board 5 in FIG. 200 (B) should not be performed. .. The pre-suggestion effect when selecting an off-route does not lead to the open state of the non-electric start winning opening, but at least the prize ball is paid out by letting the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 win the game ball by a normal hit. It does not give a big disadvantage to the player, and can be used as a way to enhance the interest of the game.

As a gaming machine that makes it possible to realize the fourth feature relating to the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the configuration and control described in the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to the above, and the configuration as described below may be provided, or the control as described below may be performed.

For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine capable of realizing the fourth feature is the first starting winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, and the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, as illustrated in FIGS. 114 to 116. 2 Limited to a configuration in which the non-electric start winning opening 2004 is arranged and the internal structure of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is provided with a plurality of operation trigger areas (first actuation trigger area, second actuation trigger area, outlier region). Not done. Specifically, at least the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are arranged, and as an internal configuration of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, a first passage having a first operation trigger region is provided. It suffices if 2011d and the second passage 2011e having the second operation trigger region are provided. Even with such a minimum configuration, when a normal hit occurs in a normal game state, the degree of profit is higher than that of a game aiming at the normal first start winning opening 2002a as an opening pattern of the movable member 2011a. One of a plurality of operation patterns including the first advantageous opening operation and the second advantageous opening operation having a higher profit degree than the first advantageous opening operation is selected and executed based on the type of normal hit. Will be done. Therefore, by recognizing such a type of normal hit and the operation pattern to be executed before the normal hit game is started, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests a non-electric start winning opening to be in an open state in advance. it can.

Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal hold display 1408 is set to store up to a plurality of normal determination storage numbers (normal figure hold storage numbers) (for example, 4), the normal figure hold. By pre-reading the memory, the type of the winning symbol derived by the ordinary lottery is preliminarily determined before the symbol variation of the ordinary symbol is started, and based on the result of the determination, any one of a plurality of types of prior suggestion effects May be executed during the symbol variation in which the normal hit is derived.

In addition, as described above, when the pre-reading of the normal figure hold memory is performed and the pre-suggestion effect is performed, the pre-suggestion effect is performed from the execution of the symbol change before the pre-read normal symbol change. You may. That is, the advance suggestion effect may be performed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and in such a case, the advance suggestion effect can be displayed for a longer period of time, so that the player is sufficiently prepared for right-handed hitting. It is possible to provide a variety of preparation periods, or to display it like a continuous production to enhance the game's interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the open / closed state of the non-electric start winning opening is detected by a sensor or the like and sent to the main control board 1310, for example, two non-electric start winning prizes are obtained in the normal gaming state. It can be recognized that one of the mouths (for example, the first non-electric start winning mouth 2002b) is in the open state. Here, if the normal hit by the hit symbol 3 is determined in advance, it is assumed that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 will also be opened in the future. This is the occurrence of the "state in which a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings are overlapped and remains open (double opening)" described in the third feature. In such a situation where double opening can occur, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may perform "advance suggestion effect of opening mode" in a special effect mode.

However, in order to complete the double opening, it is preferable to take care so that the game ball does not enter the already opened non-electric starting winning opening (in this case, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b). .. Therefore, for example, in the pre-suggestion effect of double opening by a special effect mode, the timing of starting right-handed hitting is limited to the timing of surely entering the normal electric winning opening 2011, or the game ball is hit right-handed in a single shot. You may also teach them to do so.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the "effect related to the non-electric start winning opening" described in the second and third features, the "pre-suggestion effect in the open state" is also produced. When a "predetermined game situation" that may confuse the player or give a disadvantage to the player by executing is in progress (during special symbol hit fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) Can limit the execution of such an effect.

Specifically, for example, if an effect screen such as the "opening chance" shown in FIG. 200 is displayed during the hit fluctuation of the special symbol, the reach screen is not displayed even though the hit fluctuation of the special symbol is in progress. Problems such as occur. Since the big hit of the special symbol is a bigger privilege than the opening of the non-electric start winning opening, in such a case, the "preliminary suggestion effect of the open state" is restricted as the "predetermined game situation".

Then, as in the above specific example, in the case of determining whether or not the advance suggestion effect in the open state can be executed in consideration of the hit variation of the special symbol, the main control board 1310 only pre-reads the normal figure hold memory. Instead, the reserved memory related to the special lottery (1st special figure reserved memory, 2nd special figure reserved memory) is also pre-read, and based on these pre-reading results, it is determined whether or not the open state advance suggestion effect can be executed. You may.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading result of the reserved memory of the normal figure and the pre-reading result of the reserved memory related to the special lottery are used to suggest the result due to the special symbol variation in advance (for the so-called pre-reading suggestion effect). (Equivalent) and an effect that suggests the result of the normal symbol variation in advance (corresponding to the advance suggestion effect in the open state) may be executed by an effect of a similar aspect (special look-ahead effect). That is, when it is determined that the look-ahead result is either a normal hit (normal symbol) or a big hit (special symbol), the "special look-ahead effect" is produced in a production mode in which it is difficult for the player to understand which result will be obtained. To be executed. By doing so, if it is a big hit result, a big profit of a big hit game is given to the player, but even if it is a normal hit result, the same effect as the advance suggestion effect can be expected. The prize balls will be paid out when the prize is won in the electric winning opening, and the non-electric starting winning opening will be open. As a result, when the special look-ahead effect is executed, the player receives a considerable amount of profit regardless of the result, so that the effect can greatly enhance the interest of the game.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single-function element (an element having one electrical function (resistive element, etc.)) is enclosed. For example, there are a few elements having a specific function. It is a concept that includes parts that are enclosed in one package.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 10 Upper frame member 11 Engagement notch 12 Mounting step 20 Lower frame member 21 Engagement notch 22 Front end notch 30 Left frame Member 31 Recessed 32 Protruding part 40 Right frame member 41 Recessed 42 Protruding part 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extension part 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall part 55 Return part 56 Left mounting part 57 Right mounting part 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixing part 62 Front extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Horizontal fixing part 65 Hanging part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operation part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 Rising part 73 Lower outer frame hinge pin 74 Discharge hole
80 Curtain plate reinforcing member 81 Left sliding member 82 Right sliding member 85 Connecting member 85A Upper left connecting member 85B Upper right connecting member 85C Lower left connecting member 85D Lower right connecting member 86 Horizontal fixing part 87 Upper horizontal fixing part 88 Lower horizontal fixing part 89 Bending part 90 Upper hooking member 91 Lower hooking member 95 Guide blade 96 Guide blade 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through port 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting part 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Lower plate passage port 117 Passage port for upper plate 118 Glass unit mounting part 119 Speaker insertion port 130 Reinforcement unit 131 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 132 Middle reinforcement sheet metal 132a Notch 133 Left reinforcement sheet metal 134 Right reinforcement sheet metal 135 Locking part 140 Door frame side upper hinge member 141 Door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141a Protruding piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Door member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative board 161 Decorative board 161a LED on the left side of the door frame
162 Door frame Left side lower decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass unit mounting member 171 Base 172 Protruding part 180 Handle mounting member 181 Cylinder part 182 Flange part 183 Protrusion 184 Reinforcing rib 190 Glass unit 191 Glass frame 191a Mounting piece 191b Locking piece 192 Glass plate 194 Frame Decorative drive amplifier board 194a + 9V Creation circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Rear protrusion 203 Locking piece 210 Opening / closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Key hole 212 Rotation transmission member 212a Notch 213 Cylinder mounting plate metal 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Advance entrance 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Ball supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball extraction member 253a Partition part 253b Rotating glass part 253c Acting rod 253d Ball part 253d Holding part 254c Glass part 255 Ball feed solenoid 256 Ball feed operating rod 257 Ball feed crank 257a Engagement part 257b Shaft part 257c Transmission part 260 Fraud prevention member 261 Upper piece part 262 Lower piece part 263 Inclined part 270 Fal cover unit 271 272 Lid member 273 Penetration ball passage 274 Full tank ball receiving port 275 Foul ball receiving port 276 Ball discharge port 277 Storage passage 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank detection sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening / closing contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base 301b Front end 301c Groove 302 Handle 302a First protrusion 302b Second protrusion 302c Third protrusion 302d Fourth protrusion 302e Slit 302f Locking protrusion 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle Rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single-shot button 312 Single-shot button operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal board 320 Plate unit 321 Upper plate 321a Induction passage 321b Earth fitting 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate Ball removal hole (lower plate outlet)
322b Relief part 322c Ball guidance part (guidance means)
322d buffer (induction means)
322e return part (guidance means)
323 Plate unit base 323a Upper plate ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower plate ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed taxiway 323f Ball removal taxiway 323g Opening 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Main body part 325B First extension part 325C Second extension part 325a Bottom Wall part 325b Main body standing wall part 326 Dish unit cover (covering part)
326a Production operation unit mounting part (covering part)
326b Dish front upper decoration part 326c Dish front lower decoration part 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Mounting space 327 Upper plate ball removal button (discharge operation part)
327a Operation transmission unit 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper plate ball removal spring 328 Ball rental button 329 Return button 330 Ball rental display unit 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Lower plate ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Lower plate ball Extraction base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover standing wall part 340b Ceiling part 365 Frequency display board 365a Ball rental switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate 1st area A2 Lower plate 2nd area PL dividing line 400 (Cover)
400A Second production operation unit (covered part)
410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 411a 1st button decoration 411b 2nd button decoration 412 Button frame 412a Frame opening 413 Button base 413a Main body 413b Flange 413c Guide boss 413d Detection piece 413e Base opening 415 Frame unit 416 Frame main body 416a Opening 416b Outer peripheral opening 416c Notch 416d Inner cylinder 416e Mounting 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Board unit 421 Board base 422 Operation button Left outer decorative board 422a First LED
422b 2nd LED
423 Operation button Right outer decorative board 423a First LED
423b 2nd LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light-shielding wall part 432 Operation button Interior decoration member 432a Peripheral wall part 432b Front plate part 432c Opening part 432d Flange part 432e Flanging part 432e Inner decoration part 423g Second button Inner decoration part 433 Operation button Left inner decoration board 434 Operation button Right inner decoration board 435 Operation button Upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button Lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens decoration board 438 Operation button Spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Pressure detection sensor 441 Production operation unit Relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body 451b Cover 451c Through hole 451d Holding hole 451e Upper bearing 451f Lower bearing 451g Rotation control 452 Button shaft 454 Pressure detection sensor 460 Door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decoration part 472b Screen part 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Actuating gear member 475a Gear tooth 475b Stopper 475c Detection piece 476 Subscreen decoration member 477 Subscreen decoration board 477a LED
478 Peripheral decorative member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Recessed 482 Frame top lens decorative substrate 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotation drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens part 505 Projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Top cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Cushioning unit 511 Cushioning member 512 Cushioning base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second production operation unit Relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame Left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Opening 532 Left unit diffuser lens member 532A Upper diffuser lens member 532B Lower diffuser lens member 532a Circular lens part 532b Square lens part 532c Central diffuser lens part 532d Front diffuser lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflection part 534 Left unit upper decoration base 535 Left unit lower decorative base 536 Left unit decorative cover 537 Decorative member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b right LED
552c medium LED
553 Right unit left diffuser lens member 553a Main body 553b Rear wall 553c Notch 553d Containment recess 553e Input lens 553f Side reflector 554 Right unit Left decorative member 555 Right unit Left cover 556 Right unit Right diffuser lens member 556a Main body 556b Rear wall part 556c Notch part 556d Storage recess 556e Input lens part 556f Side reflection part 557 Right unit Right decorative member 558 Right unit Right cover 559 Right unit Left shading member 559a Main body part 559b Rear wall part 559c Notch part 559d Reinforcement part 560 Right unit Right light-shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative part 561b Multi-faceted decorative part 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Center base 571 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decoration 574f Top right decoration 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decoration member 577 Door frame Top middle decoration board 578 Light guide member 578a Straight part 578b Arc part 578c Diffuse reflection part 578d Input part 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens part 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens part 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door frame Top left decorative board 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Board base 586 Door frame top Middle left Decorative board 586a LED
587 Door frame top Middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Light-shielding member 589 Door frame Top unit Relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Top cover 592 Bottom cover CL Center axis (of operation button 410)
600 Body frame base 601 Game board insertion port 602 Game board mounting part 603 Game board regulation part 604 Launcher mounting part 605 Cylinder insertion port 606 Connection opening 607 Speaker opening 608 Rear extension part 609 Upper hinge mounting part 610 Lower hinge mounting part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame opening switch 619 Main body frame opening switch 620 Main body frame side Upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge Main body 622 Main body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Main body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge 1st body 643 Lower hinge 2nd body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Control piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launcher 681 Launch base 682 Launch solenoid 683 Launch rail 684 Launch rail 700 Locking unit 701 Unit base 702 Door frame hinge 703 Outer frame hinge 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Payout unit 801 Payout unit base 802 Ball tank 803 Tank rail 804 Ball leveling member 820 Ball guidance unit 821 Front case 821a Ball guidance inlet 821b Guidance outlet 821c Guidance passage 821d Introductory part 821e Detection part 821f Hinge part 821g Notch part 822 Rear case 822a Ball guidance entrance 822b Ball guidance outlet 822c Guidance passage 822d Introductory part 822e Detection part 822f Hinge part 8 Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extension part 825d Connecting part 825e Weight mounting part 825f Detection piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member rear 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extending part 826d Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball out detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge entrance 831b Discharge outlet 831c Ball extraction exit 831d Discharge passage 831e Ball extraction passage 831f Guidance shelf 831g Lever mounting part 831g Lever mounting part 832 Ball removal outlet 832d Discharge passage 832e Ball removal passage 832f Guidance shelf 832g Lever mounting part 833 Front Cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 836 Intermediate gear 837 Driven gear 837a Gear part 837b Detection piece 837c Connecting part 838 Shaft member 839 Dispensing blade 839a Base cylinder part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected part 839e Sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Payout detection sensor 843 Ball pulling movable piece 843a Main body part 843b Shaft cylinder part 843c Protruding part 843d Weight mounting part 844 Ball pulling lever 850 Upper full tank ball path unit 850a Upper payout ball receiving port 850b Upper ball pulling entrance 850c Upper ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Section section 850g Upper ball removal passage 850h Upper ball removal outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Discharge device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting part 860 Lower full tank ball Route unit 860b Error LED display 861 Normal guide path 862 Full tank guide path 863 Guide path opening / closing door 863a Base 863b First door plate 863c Second door plate 863d Extension 863e Acting protrusion 864 Closing spring 865 Lower ball removal Guideway 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss part 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal plate 869 Game ball rental device connection terminal plate 870 Guideway opening / closing door 870a Base 870b First door plate 870c Second door plate 870d Recess 870e Part 880 Main door relay terminal board 882 Peripheral door relay terminal board 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power board box 934 Power switch 931 Power board 935 Power control unit 935a Synchronous rectifier circuit 935b Power factor improvement circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power supply creation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Payout control board box 951 Payout control board 951a Payout control filter circuit 952 Payout control unit 952a Payout control MPU
952b Payout control input circuit 952c Payout control output circuit 952d Payout motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input / output circuit 953 Launch control unit 953a Launch control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Impulsion part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning protrusion 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch part 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step 1122 Through port 1123 Protruding pin 1124 Engagement claw 1125 Engagement piece 1126 Out port 1127 Notch 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Insertion port 1150 Game panel (second embodiment) )
1151 Out port 1152 Notch 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge part 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1310a Main control MPU
1310aa Main control CPU core 1310ae Main peripheral serial transmission port 1310aea Transmission shift register 1310aeb Transmission buffer register 1310aec Serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cc Main control output circuit without reset function 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g + 5V creation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status display 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special hold number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special hold number display 1407 Round display Instrument 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b + 3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa Peripheral control CPU core 1511ab Peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A / D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display control unit 1512a VDP with built-in sound source
1512b LCD and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Door frame side production transmitter IC
1512e Differentiation circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Liquid crystal module 1600b Backlight power supply 1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2002a No. 1 Start winning opening 2002b 1st non-electric starting winning opening 2003 (2003a, 2003b) Gate 2004 2nd starting opening (2nd non-electric starting winning opening)
2005 Large winning opening 2011 Ordinary electric winning opening 2011a Movable member 2011b Distribution member 2011c 3rd passage 2011d 1st passage 2011d 2nd passage 2100 Starting port unit 2101 Unit base 2102 Ball receiver 2103 Front decoration base member 2104 Front center decoration board 2105 Front Decorative member 2105a Fake part 2106 Guidance passage member 2107 Normal figure solenoid 2108 Attacker solenoid 2200 Side unit lower 2300 Side unit upper 2500 Center accessory 2520 Warp entrance 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b LCD mounting part 3010c Fixed groove 3010d Notch 3010e Fixed piece 3042 Production drive board box 3050 Back left middle decoration unit 3100 Back bottom rear movable production unit 3200 Back top left movable production unit 3300 Back left movable production unit 3400 Back top middle movable production unit 3500 Back bottom Front movable effect unit 4002 First start port sensor 4003 Gate sensor 4004 Second start port sensor 4005 Count sensor 4020 General winning port sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input section 4163 Voltage output section 4164 Detection circuit section 4165 RTC Control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising part 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board 4450 Effect display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side effect module Power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side effect module Backlight power supply circuit MGS Magnetic sensor STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR contact resistor CNO2 connector

Claims (1)

A game machine with a front door
The upper plate provided on the front door and
A storage unit provided on the front door and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper plate,
A predetermined effect device or a predetermined operation device provided on the front door is provided.
The front door is formed with a predetermined space that is out of the reach of the player during the game at a position including the upper part of the storage unit, and the effect device or the operation device is arranged in the predetermined space. It's a thing
The storage unit is provided with a storage unit cover that blocks communication between the game ball storage area in the storage unit and the predetermined space.
The storage portion cover constitutes at least the ceiling portion of the storage portion.
The effect device or the operation device is arranged in the predetermined space without touching the storage portion cover .
The effect device or the operation device can be removed from the predetermined space without removing the storage unit cover from the storage unit .
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a state where the effect device or the operation device is removed from the predetermined space, the standing wall portion of the storage portion can be visually recognized from the outside through the predetermined space.